Home

Eaton SPX App Manual MN04004001E

1. m 4 5 9 Brake chopper pi 0 Disabled 1 Used when running 2 External brake chopper 3 Used when stopped running 4 Used when running no testing indi 4 6 function 019 0 Ramp 1 Flying start indi 4 7 uin function oum 0 Coasting 1 Ramp 2 Ramp Run enable coast 3 Coast Run enable ramp Pree ong ime aa amos d 907 o P1 4 9 DC braking time sid qms 0 DC brake is off at stop mm d inia NN P1 4 10 Frequency to start DC sili uini 00 s braking during ramp stop P1 4 11 DC braking time 600 00 LOT 0 DC brake is off at start at start mer fas e ps on y P1413 Fluxbraking current 04xin 2xia A 59 Prohibit Frequency Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 5 Table 4 7 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note PU range owt o fa EOS o M range 1 low limit 1 5 2 PU range trigntimme 0 reme PD o HP et range 1 high limit PU Jmmezowimt sa P range 2 low limit 1 5 2 P1 5 4 Prohibit frequency 320 00 Hz 512 0 Prohibit range 2 is off range 2 high limit P1 5 5 Prohibit frequency par Hz 513 range 3 low limit 1 5 2 P1 5 6 Prohibit frequency 320 00 Hz 514 0 Prohibit range 3 is off range 3 high limit PTS7 ProhibitaccJdec ramp 01 100 0o 88 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 4 9 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005
2. G1 6 2 c ce eee 7 22 Table 7 18 Protections G1 7 0 0c hm ees 7 23 Table 7 19 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 0 00 ccc eee 7 24 Table 7 20 Pump and Fan Control Parameters G1 9 leeren 7 25 Table 7 21 Keypad Control Parameters M2 0 0 cc es 7 26 Table 9 1 Proset SP00 esde cacao sok oe d E CI Y EX PEDE pata pe bee ee ees a PR 8 1 Table 8 2 Preset Speeds 3tO 7 1 ee eee eet 8 5 Table 8 3 Multi Step Speed Selections with Digital Inputs DIN3 DIN4 DIND Om DING sce nci omo wee G8 ws ee a ee eS ee ek ee RR RES EU URSR PES 8 7 Table 8 4 Selections for ID143 0 0 cc RR RR RR RR RR hn 8 8 Table 8 5 Selections for ID171 and ID172 es 8 9 Table 8 6 Selections for ID173 and ID174 llle 8 10 Table 8 7 Analog Output Scaling 0 0 0 eee eee ns 8 18 Table 8 8 Output Signals Via DO1 and Output Relays RO1 and RO2 8 19 Table 8 9 Selections for D320 0 444 ks gk RR av RECRT RORORO E ae Xa OR XO C 33 x i gs 8 22 Table 8 10 Selections for Parameter ID325 llle 8 24 Table 8 11 Selections for 1D332 ius dcs x ean ee EE 2 4b 3 RC dE US ee HR eee 8 25 Table 8 12 Size Dependent Switching Frequencies 00 cee eee eee 8 57 Table 8 13 Typical Monitored Items elle 8 72 Table 8 14 Selectable Wake Up Functions 0000 0 cece eee eens 8 77 For more information visit www EatonElectrical co
3. ee eet eee 6 25 Table 6 24 Torque Control Parameters G1 10 00 0 cee es 6 26 Table 6 25 Keypad Control Parameters M2 llle 6 27 Table 7 1 Pump and Fan Control Application Default I O Configuration and Connection Example with 2 wire transmitter llle 7 2 Table 7 2 Monitoring ValUBS x3 x aca fe eee band CREE C tase 9e CC eR CR des 7 10 Table 7 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 leeeeeeeee hr 7 11 Table 7 4 Input Signals Basic Settings G1 2 1 0 0 0 cee 7 13 Table 7 5 Input Signals Analog Input 1 G1 2 2 1 2 0 es 7 14 Table 7 6 Input Signals Analog Input 2 G1 2 3 leere 7 14 Table 7 7 Input Signals Analog Input 3 G1 2 4 llle 7 15 Table 7 8 Input Signals Analog Input 4 G1 2 5 lleleleleeees 7 15 Table 7 9 Input Signals Digital Inputs G1 2 6 0 0 ee 7 15 Table 7 10 Output Signals Digital Outputs G1 3 1 llle 7 17 Table 7 11 Output Signals Limit Settings G1 3 2 llle 7 18 Table 7 12 Output Signals Analog Output 1 G1 3 3 0 ce es 7 19 Table 7 13 Output Signals Analog Output 2 G1 3 4 2 2 ee 7 20 Table 7 14 Output Signals Analog Output 3 G1 3 5 ee 7 20 Table 7 15 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 00 cc es 7 21 Table 7 16 Skip Frequencies G1 5 0 eee eee 7 22 Table 7 17 Motor Control Parameters
4. p P aet P1 7 5 Response to 1 3 2 727 undervoltage fault P1 7 6 Output phase 702 supervision PII tamfutproecion 0 3 2 f po P1 7 8 Thermal protection of 3 Ber the motor 1 7 9 Motor ambient 100 0 100 0 705 PU Memperaturetector fn fe PME P1 7 10 Motor cooling factor at 150 0 706 Los pesa e RUP Om P1 7 11 Motor thermal time min ME qe constant wien fo m pot ae 708 Stall protection 0 oo response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 2 9 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 2 9 Protections G1 7 Continued Me uu IN NA TNINMCINMEM 4 Pe Same in 100 ao fs 1890 8 E 1 2 P1 7 17 Underload protection 713 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 18 Field weakening area load P1 7 19 Zero frequency load 0 0 m 0 P1 7 20 Underload protection ye fo time limit P1 7 21 Response to ul No response thermistor fault 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting ee ee EN fault ee m Autorestart Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 8 Table 2 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 Pru M ONEIMIENEREGNIS ME PI amp T Wait me fomo 1000 s 080 po ow fow s 900 718 P1 8 3 Star
5. Column explanations Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID 2 Location indication on the keypad Shows the operator the present parameter number Name of parameter Minimum value of parameter Maximum value of parameter Unit of parameter value Given if available Value preset by factory Customer s own setting ID number of the parameter Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has been stopped Use TTF method to program these parameters See Page 6 3 Monitoring Values Control Keypad Menu M7 MN04004001E The monitoring values are the actual values of parameters and signals as well as statuses and measurements Monitoring values cannot be edited see SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 for more information Table 2 2 Monitoring Values Output frequency Frequency reference Motor speed Motor current Motor torque Motor power Motor voltage DC Bus voltage Unit temperature Motor temperature Analog input 1 Analog input 2 DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 DIN4 DIN5 DING V1 1 DO1 RO1 RO2 Output frequency to motor Frequency reference to motor control Motor speed in rpm In of the nominal motor torque Motor shaft power Heatsink temperature Calculated motor temperature I1 2 L N T N 1 25 2 3 TT 5 7 Oo Digital input statuses Digital input statuses Digital and relay output statuses 13 14 15 16 17 For more information visit www E
6. N 508 0 DC brake is off at stop i 0 DC brake is off at start tl 31 520 E a T JL o o MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 3 9 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Prohibit Frequency Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 5 Code Parameter Mi Max Unit Default Cust D Noe P1 5 1 Prohibit par 1 5 2 Hz 509 frequency range 1 low limit Hz 510 frequency range 1 high limit P1 5 4 Prohibit 320 00 Hz 0 Prohibit range 2 is off frequency range 2 high limit F1 5 5 Prohibit par 1 5 2 Hz frequency range 3 low limit P1 5 7 Prohibit acc dec 0 1 10 0 1 0 518 ramp Motor Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 6 Code Parameter Mim Mex Unit Defaut Cust D Noe P1 6 1 Motor control 1 6 0 Frequency control mode 1 Speed control P1 6 2 V Hz 1 109 0 Not used optimization 1 Automatic torque boost P1 6 3 V Hz ratio 3 108 0 Linear selection 1 Squared 2 Programmable 3 Linear with flux optim Table 3 7 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 P1 5 2 Prohibit 0 Prohibit range 1 is off P1 5 3 Prohibit par 1 5 2 Hz frequency range 2 low limit P1 5 6 Prohibit 320 00 Hz 0 Prohibit range 3 is off frequency range 3 high limit Table 3 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Additionally for SPX 2 Torque control 3 Closed loop speed ctrl 4 Closed loop torque c
7. 1010 Start delay of auxiliary 7 P1 9 10 drives The frequency of the drive controlled by the frequency converter must remain above the start frequency of the auxiliary drive for the time defined with this parameter before the auxiliary drive is started The delay defined applies to all auxiliary drives This prevents unnecessary starts caused by the start limit being momentarily exceeded See Figure 8 54 1011 Stop delay of auxiliary 7 P1 9 11 drives The frequency of the drive controlled by the frequency converter must remain below the stop limit of the auxiliary drive for the time defined with this parameter before the auxiliary drive is stopped The delay defined applies to all auxiliary drives This prevents unnecessary stops caused by the stop limit frequency momentarily dropping below the limit See Figure 8 54 Output Output Start Delay of the Aux Frequency Frequency Drives ID1010 F3 F Start Freq of Aux Drive 1 Start Freq of Aux Drive 1 requency ID1002 1 Hz ID1002 1 Hz 1 Increases During the Frequency Start Delay After Starting the Aux Drive 1Is 7 ID1003 1 Hz Stop Freq of Aux Drive 1 VU TOUS 1 Hz N N Frequency After Frequency Start Freq of Aux Drive 1 Starting the Decreases During IStop Delay of the Aux ID1003 1 Hz Aux Drive 1 is i the Stop Delay Drives ID1011 ID1003 1 Hz Figure 8 54 Example of Parameter Setting Variable Speed Drive and One Auxilia
8. E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Output Frequency t DIN2 DIN2 RUN RUN STOP STOP a DIN3 as DC brake command input and stop mode Ramp b DIN3 as DC brake command input and stop mode Coasting Figure 8 9 DIN3 as DC Brake Command Input a Stop mode ramp b Stop mode coasting 302 Reference offset for current 12 P1 15 P1 2 3 input 0 No offset 0 20 mA 1 Offset 4 mA living zero provides supervision of zero level signal In the Standard Application the response to reference fault can be programmed with ID700 303 Reference scaling minimum 2346 P1 2 4 P1 2 16 P1 2 2 6 value 304 Reference scaling maximum 2346 P 1 2 5 P 1 2 17 P 1 2 2 7 value Setting value limits 0 lt ID303 lt ID304 lt ID102 If ID303 0 scaling is set off The minimum and maximum frequencies are used for scaling Output Output Frequency Frequency Max Frequency ID102 Max Frequency ID102 ID304 Ref Scaling Max Value 1 2 23 Analog Analog Min Frequency ID101 Input V Min Frequency ID101 Input V With Reference Scaling Without Reference Scaling Figure 8 10 With and Without Reference Scaling Left Reference scaling Right No scaling used ID303 0 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 15 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 305 Reference inversion 2 P1 2 6 Inverts reference signal Max ref signal Min set fre
9. FBOWBI P133260 Fieldbusinputdetes o fon r eow ooo 133270 Fieldbus inputdetes fo fon pe PbOWBM ooo P133 28 Fieldbusinputdatas o on mo FB CW B15 A CAUTION Be ABSOLUTELY sure not to connect two functions to one and same output in order to avoid function overruns and to ensure flawless operation 6 16 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Limit Settings Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 4 Table 6 14 Limit Settings G1 3 4 Code Parameter Min Mex Unit Default Cust ID Nos P1 3 4 1 Output frequency 9 315 0 No limit limit 1 supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision 3 Brake on control P1 3 4 2 Output frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz 316 limit 1 Supervised value P1 3 4 3 Output frequency 0 No limit limit 2 supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision 3 Brake off control 4 Brake on off control P1 3 4 4 Output frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz limit 2 Supervised value P1 3 4 5 Torque limit 3 0 Not used supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision 3 Brake off control P1 3 4 6 Torque limit 1000 0 1000 0 100 0 349 supervision value P1 3 4 7 Reference limit 2 350 0 Not used supervision 1 Low limit 2 High limit P1 3 4 8 Reference limit Par 1 1 2 Hz 351 supervision value P1 3 4 9 External brake off 100 0 0 5 352 de
10. p hb b mme p p b b manm p b b PID controller D time 57 P1 1 14 ID132 defines the derivative time of the PID controller If this parameter is set to 1 00 second a change of 1096 in the error value during 1 00 s causes the controller output to change by 10 00 If the parameter value is set to 0 00 s the PID controller will operate as PI controller See examples below Example 1 In order to reduce the error value to zero with the given values the frequency converter output behaves as follows Given values P1 1 12 P 0 P1 1 13 l time 1 00 s P1 1 14 D time 0 00 s Min freq 0 Hz Error value setpoint process value 10 00 Max freq 60 Hz In this example the PID controller operates practically as an l controller only According to the given value of P1 1 13 I time the PID output increases by 5 Hz 10 of the difference between the maximum and minimum frequency every second until the error value is O For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 5 SPX9000 AF Drives 8 6 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 PID Output Error Value 10 l Part 5 Hz s Part 5 Hz s Part 5 Hz s Part 5 Hz s Part 5 Hz s Figure 8 3 PID Controller Function as I Controller Example 2 Given values P1 1 12 P 100 P1 1 13 l time 1 00 s P1 1 14 D time 1 00 s Min freq 0 Hz Error value setpoint process val
11. Noe P1251 AI signal selection Annon anneo AmNGi Wa oo P1252 Alfitertime 000 1000 s om0 188_ O Nofiteing Al4 signal range 2 154 0 Signal range 0 100 9 1 Signal range 20 100 9 2 Custom range P1 2 5 4 Al4 custom 160 00 160 00 155 minimum setting P1 2 5 5 Al4 custom 160 00 160 00 A 100 00 156 maximum setting P1 2 5 6 Al4 inversion 1 162 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 Digital Inputs Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 6 Table 7 9 Input Signals Digital Inputs G1 2 6 Code Parameter Min Mex Unit Deta Cust 0 ne P217 erasum Dinor omea piona pa PI2827 St B signe DiglNO1 Digin 10 ionas pa P1 2 6 39 Control place A B DiglN 01 Digln E 10 DigIN A 6 425 Control place A oc 9 selection Control place B cc 9 P1 2 6 42 External fault DigIN 01 Digln E 10 DiglN 0 1 405 Ext fault displayed cc 9 close idi Ext fault displayed oc P1 2 4 4 AI3 custom 100 00 100 00 Ao minimum setting P1 2 6 59 External fault DigIN 01 Digln E 10 DiglN 0 2 open P1 2 6 6 2 DigIN 01 Digin E 10 DigIN 0 1 EE 407 Motor start enabled cc P1 2 6 72 Acc Dec time DigIN 01 Digln E 10 DigIN 0 1 selection cc closing contact oc opening contact 408 Acc Dec time 1 oc 9 Acc Dec time 2 cc 9 MN04004001E For
12. P1 9 3 Stop frequency P1 1 1 P1 9 2 Hz 10 00 1003 auxiliary drive 1 P1 9 4 Start frequency P1 9 5 320 00 Hz 61 00 1004 auxiliary drive 2 P1 9 5 Stop frequency P1 1 1 P1 9 4 Hz 10 00 1005 auxiliary drive 2 P1 9 6 Start frequency P1 9 7 320 00 Hz 61 00 1006 auxiliary drive 3 P1 9 7 Stop frequency P1 1 1 P1 9 6 Hz 10 00 1007 auxiliary drive 3 P1 9 8 Start frequency P1 9 9 320 00 Hz 61 00 1008 auxiliary drive 4 P1 9 9 Stop frequency P1 1 1 P1 9 8 Hz 10 00 1009 auxiliary drive 4 P1 9 10 Start delay 300 0 1010 auxiliary drives P1 9 11 Stop delay 300 0 2 0 1011 auxiliary drives P1 9 12 Reference step 100 0 1012 auxiliary drive 1 P1 9 13 Reference step 100 0 1013 auxiliary drive 2 P1 9 14 Reference step 100 0 1014 auxiliary drive 3 P1 9 15 Reference step 100 0 1015 auxiliary drive 4 P1 9 16 PID controller 1 1020 1 PID contr bypassed bypass P1 9 17 Analog input 5 1021 0 Not used selection for input pressure measurement 5 Fieldbus signal P1 9 18 Input pressure 100 0 30 00 1022 high limit P1 9 19 Input pressure 100 0 20 00 1023 low limit P1 9 20 Output pressure 100 0 30 00 1024 drop P1 9 21 Frequency drop 300 0 1025 0 0 No delay delay 300 0 No frequency drop MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 25 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 7 20 Pump and Fan Control Parameters G1 9 Continued Code Parameter Min Mex
13. Start of motor enabled Acceleration Deceleration time 67 P1 2 7 13 P1 2 6 7 selection Contact open Acceleration Deceleration time 1 selected Contact closed Acceleration Deceleration time 2 selected Set Acceleration Deceleration times with ID103 and ID 104 Control from I O terminal 67 P1 2 7 18 P1 2 6 8 Contact closed Force control place to I O terminal Control from keypad 67 P1 2 7 19 P1 2 6 9 Contact closed Force control place to keypad Reverse 67 P1 2 7 4 P1 2 6 11 Contact open Direction forward Contact closed Direction reverse Jogging speed 67 P1 2 7 10 P1 2 6 13 Contact closed Jog speed selected for frequency reference See parameter ID124 Default programming A 4 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 43 SPX9000 AF Drives 4149 415 416 4179 418 419 420 9 4212 422 423 2 4242 4252 8 44 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Fault reset 67 P1 2 7 10 P1 2 6 13 Contact closed All faults are reset Acceleration Deceleration 67 P1 2 7 14 P1 2 6 14 prohibited Contact closed No acceleration or deceleration possible until the contact is opened DC braking 67 P1 2 7 15 P1 2 6 15 Contact closed In STOP mode the DC braking operates until the contact is opened Motor potentiometer DOWN 67 P1 2 7 8 P1 2 6 16 Contact closed Motor potentiometer reference DECREASES until the contact is opened Motor potentiometer UP 67
14. These parameters define the level below which the capacity used must remain for autochange to take place This level is defined as follows e Ifthe number of running auxiliary drives is smaller than the value of ID1030 the autochange function can take place e Ifthe number of running auxiliary drives is equal to the value of ID1030 and the frequency of the controlled drive is below the value of ID1031 the autochange can take place e Ifthe value of ID1031 is 0 0 Hz the autochange can take place only in rest position Stop and Sleep regardless of the value of ID1030 Output Autochange Frequency Moment ID103071 Max Number of Auxiliary Drives ID1031 Autochange Level Frequency ID1029 ID1029 Autochange Interval Autochange Interval Aux Drive M LUL c cE 1 Control Aux Drive Moo 2 Control Figure 8 63 Autochange Interval and Limits For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 1032 Interlock selection 7 P1 9 23 With this parameter you can activate or deactivate the feedback signal from the drives The interlock feedback signals come from the switches that connect the motors to the automatic control frequency converter directly to the mains line or place them in the off state The interlock feedback functions are connected to the digital inputs of the frequency converter Program ID426 to ID430 to connect the feedback fun
15. Unit Default Cust ID Noe P1 9 22 Frequency increase 300 0 1026 0 0 No delay delay 300 0 No frequency drop Interlock selection 1032 0 Interlocks not used 1 Set new interlock last update order after value of P1 9 26 or Stop state 2 Stop and update order immediately P1 9 24 Autochange 1027 0 Not used 1 Autochange used Autochange and 1028 0 Auxiliary drives only interlock 1 All drives automatics selection P1 9 26 Autochange 3000 0 48 0 1029 0 0 TEST 40 s interval 9 Autochange 1 1030 maximum number of auxiliary drives P1 9 28 Autochange P1 1 2 Hz 30 00 1031 frequency limit P1 9 29 Actual value special 3000 0 1033 display minimum P1 9 30 Actual value special 3000 0 10 0 1034 display maximum P1 9 31 Actual value special 1 1035 display decimals Keypad Control Control Keypad Menu M2 This menu provides the parameters for the setting of the keypad frequency reference the selection of motor direction when in keypad operation and when the STOP button is active Table 7 21 Keypad Control Parameters M2 pe eme eie ee qmqeme pep ee 00 00 P2 2 Direction on 23 0 Forward Te te a 1 Rovers Fs Porree o wem x Joao moo joo PID reference 2 P2 5 Stop button active 1 1 114 0 Limited function of Stop button 1 Stop button always enabled 7 26 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 A
16. decimals of the actual value special display Observe the actual value display in menu M1 Monitoring values DO READY P12 29 qu Specl Displ Min 0 00 Actual Value Number of Min Max Decimals Figure 8 64 Actual Value Special Display MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 83 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Keypad Control Parameters Unlike the parameters listed above these parameters are located in the M2 menu of the control keypad The reference parameters do not have an ID number 114 STOP button activated P2 4 P2 6 To make the STOP button a hotspot which always stops the drive regardless of the selected control place set the value of this parameter to 1 See also ID 125 123 Keypad direction P2 3 0 Forward The rotation of the motor is forward when the keypad is the active control place 1 Reverse The rotation of the motor is reversed when the keypad is the active control place For more information see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 Keypad Control Menu M2 R3 2 Keypad reference R2 2 The frequency reference can be adjusted from the keypad with this parameter The output frequency can be copied as the keypad reference by pushing the STOP button for 3 seconds when you are on any of the pages of menu M2 For more information see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 Keypad Control Menu M2 R3 4 PID reference 1 57
17. function 1 4 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E 174 0 AM 1 Al2 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 109 0 Not used 1 Automatic torque boost 302 0 No offset 0 20 mA 1 Offset 4 mA 20 mA 0 Not used 1 Output freq 0 fmax 2 Freq reference 0 fmax 3 Motor speed 0 Motor nominal speed 4 Output current 0 lhMotor 5 Motor torque 0 ThMotor 6 Motor power 0 PhMotor 7 Motor voltage 0 Unmotor 8 DC bus volt 0 1000V E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 1 3 Basic Parameters G1 Continued oe MM E NONNNERIN INE LL P1 19 DIN3 function 0 Not used 1 Ext fault closing cont 2 Ext fault opening cont 3 Run enable cc 4 Run enable oc 5 Force CP to Local 6 Force CP to Remote P1 20 20 Preset Presetspeed 1 1 0 00 Par 1 1 2 1 1 2 Hz J105 Speeds preset by operator UT 21 Preset sese speed 2 2 500 Ps 1 12 1 1 2 60 00 s he Speeds preset by operator LL UM 22 52 1 restart 731 0 Disabled 1 Enabled CP control place cc closing contact oc opening contact Keypad Control Control Keypad Menu M2 The parameters for the selection of control place and direction on the keypad are listed below See the Keypad Control Menu in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Table 1 4 Keypad Control Parameters M2 NGC NND Lc LN ANN FT K
18. inversion yes no P1 2 14 AI2 signal filter time 10 00 329 Analog input 2 reference filter aa constant rt fwd NN rt rvs Start Stop Rvs Fwd Start Stop Run enable Start pulse Stop pulse Fwd Rvs 9 Start Stop Rvs Fwd Start Stop Run enable P1 2 15 Place B Start Stop logic selection P1 2 16 Place A Reference scaling minimum value P1 2 17 Place A Reference scaling maximum value P1 2 18 Place B Reference scaling minimum value P1 2 19 Place B Reference scaling maximum value P1 2 20 Free analog input signal selection P1 2 21 Free analog input function P1 2 22 Motor 2000 0 Hz s potentiometer ramp time P1 2 23 Motor 367 0 No reset potentiometer 1 Reset if stopped or powered down 2 Reset if powered down par 1 2 17 Hz Selects the frequency that corresponds to the min 320 00 E reference signal par 1 2 T B lH 304 Selects the frequency that corresponds to the max reference signal 0 00 No scaling gt 0 scaled max value 364 _ Selects the frequency that corresponds to the min reference signal 365 Selects the frequency that corresponds to the max reference signal 0 00 No scaling gt 0 scaled max value 361 0 Not used 1 U analog volt input 2 analog curr input 362 0 No function 1 Reduces current limit par 1 1 5 2 Reduces DC braking current 3 Reduces accel and decel times 4 Reduces torque super
19. programmable Contact closed P1 4 3 P1 4 4 in use Common for DIN4 DIN6 Connect to GND or 24V Output frequency Programmable Analog output Range 0 20 mA RL max 5000 Digital output Programmable READY Open collector x 50 mA V lt 48V DC Relay output 1 Programmable RUN Relay output 2 Programmable FAULT Note For more information on jumper selections see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 Jumper Block X3 CMA and CMB Grounding ee CMB connected to GND e CMA connected to GND ele CMB isolated from GND ele CMA isolated from GND ele CMB and CMA internally connected together isolated from GND Factory default 6 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Terminal To Function TTF Programming Principle The programming principle of the input and output signals in the Multi Purpose Control Application as well as in the Pump and Fan Control Application and partly in the other applications is different compared to the conventional method used in other SVX applications In the conventional programming method Function To Terminal programming method FTT you have a fixed input or output that you define a certain function for The applications mentioned above however use the Terminal To Function programming method TTF in which the programming process is carried out the other way round Function
20. programming method used See Page 6 3 P1 2 9 Al2 signal selection A 2 388 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 9 Rising edge required to start CP control place Output Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 Table 2 5 Output Signals G1 3 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note P1 3 1 Analog output 1 signal A 1 TTF programming method used selection See Page 6 3 Analog output 307 0 Not used function 1 Output freq 0 fmax 2 Freq reference 0 f 3 Motor speed 0 Motor nominal speed 4 Motor current 0 Innotor 5 Motor torque 0 ThMotor 6 Motor power 0 Puro 7 Motor voltage 0 Unmotor 8 DC Bus volt 0 1000V P1 3 3 Analog output filter 10 00 eo pae mw 0 No filtering time MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 2 b SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 2 5 Output Signals G1 3 Continued Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID P1 3 4 Analog output 1 309 0 Not inverted Inversion 1 Inverted P1 3 5 Analog output 1 310 0 0mA 124 mA o Q o minimum PISS Analog outputscale 10 1000 4 po 9M y Digital output 1 function Flos 16 1 312 0 Not used 4 Fault inverted 5 FC overheat warning 6 Ext fault or warning 7 Ref fault or warning 8 Warning 9 Reversed 10 Preset speed 1 11 At speed
21. 1 Used 7 22 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Protections Control keypad Menu M1 gt G1 7 Table 7 18 Protections G1 7 Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cus ID Note P1 7 1 Response to 4mA 5 700 0 No response reference fault 1 Warning 2 Warning Previous Freq 3 Warning Preset Freq P1 7 2 4 Fault stop acc to P1 4 7 5 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 2 4mA reference fault P1 1 2 Hz 728 frequency PT 7 9 Response to 701 0 No response external fault 1 Warning 2 Fault stop per P1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 4 Input phase See P1 7 3 supervision P1 7 5 Response to ui 0 Fault Stored undervoltage fault 1 No History P1 7 6 Output phase 3 2 7 02 See P 1 7 3 supervision P1 7 7 Ground fault 3 2 703 See P1 7 3 protection P1 7 8 Thermal protection 3 2 704 See P1 7 3 of the motor P1 7 9 Motor ambient 100 0 100 0 705 temperature factor P1 7 10 Motor cooling 150 0 A 706 As a of In motor factor at zero speed P1 7 11 Motor thermal time 1 min 45 707 PUT Motor sutyeyee BW 7 13 Sea protection GE mE EE pane eenn See P1 7 3 m pee ae LN CUL NUM LN ERR pom see P protection trom torque f torque P1 7 20 Underload aa 00 LL 00 _ protection time limit P1 7 21 Response to 732 See P1 7 3 thermistor fault MN04004001E For more information visit ww
22. 11 P1 3 1 11 The output frequency has reached the set reference Jogging speed 67 IPT 3 3 12 P 1 3 1 12 Jogging speed selected External control place 67 iP 1 3 3 13 P1 3 1 13 Control from I O terminal selected Menu M2 ID 125 External brake control 67 P1 3 3 14 P1 3 1 14 External brake ON OFF control with programmable delay External brake control inverted 67 P1 3 3 15 P 1 3 1 15 External brake ON OFF control Output active when brake control is OFF Output frequency limit 1 67 P1 3 3 16 P1 3 1 16 supervision The output frequency is outside the set supervision low limit high limit see ID315 and ID316 Output frequency limit 2 67 P1 3 3 17 P1 3 1 17 supervision The output frequency is outside the set supervision low limit high limit see ID346 and ID347 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 449 450 9 4519 452 454 o 455 9 456 2 457 9 458 9 459 9 460 Reference limit supervision 67 P1 3 3 18 P1 3 1 18 Active reference is beyond the set supervision low limit high limit see ID350 and ID351 Temperature limit supervision 67 P1 3 3 19 P1 3 1 19 The frequency converter heatsink temperature is beyond the set supervision limits see ID354 and ID355 Torque limit supervision 67 P1 3 3 20 P1 3 1 20 The motor torque is beyond the set supervision li
23. 26 138 Preset speed 13 4 P1 1 27 139 Preset speed 14 4 P1 1 28 140 Preset speed 15 4 P1 1 29 Table 8 3 Multi Step Speed Selections with Digital Inputs DIN3 DIN4 DIN5 and DIN6 Multi step speed Multi step speed Multi step speed Multi step speed select 1 DIN4 select 2 DIN5 select 3 DIN6 select 4 DIN3 mae 0 name p p mamas e 9 P1125110 CNN l3 D pua p p h o mamas ho b h o mum fo h MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 7 SPX9000 AF Drives 1419 142 143 144 145 151 152 153 154 155 156 162 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 AI3 signal selection 567 P1 2 38 P1 2 4 1 Connect the Al3 signal to the analog input of your choice with this parameter For more information see Page 6 3 Terminal to Function TTF programming principle Al3 signal filter time 567 P1 2 41 P1 2 4 2 When this parameter is given a value greater than 0 the function that filters out disturbances from the incoming analog signal is activated A long filtering time makes the regulation response slower See ID324 AI3 signal range 567 P1 2 39 P1 2 4 3 With this parameter you can select the Al3 signal range Table 8 4 Selections for ID143 NN se k Select l O 0 100 0 100 0 100 1 20 100 20 100 20 100 jesmowmd AI3 custom setting minimum 67 P1 2 4 4 AI3 custo
24. 7 fc wire dean be ha nee eek whore bea ke eho eG adh wees 4 12 Table 4 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 0 0 0 cee ees 4 13 Table 4 11 Keypad Control Parameters M2 0 0 0 0 ees 4 13 Table 5 1 PID Application Default I O Configuration with 2 wire transmitter 5 2 Table 5 2 Monitoring ValuBSs uice uo 3d acd pce sen be ead eR Oe oe Se eda we Es 5 3 Table 5 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 llle m nn 5 4 Table 5 4 Input Signals G1 2 222r RR e RRREXRREEEGA RETE TEREG REI 5 6 Table 5 5 Output Signals G1 3 4 5 04 06 e055 br RR E ERR ERRESPAGORER EGO E RUE RR 5 9 Table 5 6 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 leeren 5 11 Table 5 7 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 llle 5 11 Table 5 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 selle 5 12 Table 5 9 Protections G1 7 llleeeeeee Rh hans 5 14 Table 5 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 leen 5 15 Table 5 11 Keypad Control Parameters M2 esee 5 16 Table 6 1 Multi Purpose Control Application Default I O Configuration and Connection Example anaana cR gos acto Oe Rae eae iO 009 dew CR DA EE D aC RR 6 2 Table 6 2 Monitoring Values SPX Drives 00 0c cee eee ees 6 7 Table 6 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 0 0 cc ee nn 6 8 Table 6 4 Input Signals Basic Settings G1 2 1 2 1 0 ce 6 10 Table 6 5 Analog Input 1 Parameters G1 2 2 eee 6 1
25. 8 57 Example of Adjustable Frequency Drive and Two Auxiliary Drives with Bypassed PID Controller 1021 Analog input selection for input 7 P1 9 17 pressure measurement 1022 Input pressure high limit 7 P1 9 18 1023 Input pressure low limit 7 P1 9 19 1024 Output pressure drop value 7 P1 9 20 In pressure increase stations there may be need for decreasing the output pressure if the input pressure decreases below a certain limit The input pressure measurement which is needed is connected to the analog input selected with ID1021 See Figure 8 58 8 78 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Input Pressure Measurement Selected with ID1021 Pl Controller Actual Value Input ID333 Figure 8 58 Input and Output Pressure Measuring ID1022 and ID1023 are used to select the limits for the area of the input pressure where the output pressure is decreased The values are in percent of the input pressure measurement maximum value With ID1024 the value for the output pressure decrease within this area can be set The value is in percent of the reference value maximum See Figure 8 59 Output Pressure ID1024 Output Pressure Drop Value Input Pressure ID1026 Input Pressure High Limit ID1032 Input Pressure Low Limit Figure 8 59 Output Pressure Behavior Depending on Input Pressure and Parameter Settings MN04004001E For more i
26. Autochange 0 Autochange not used 1 Autochange used The automatic change of starting and stopping order is activated and applied to either the auxiliary drives only or the auxiliary drives and the drive controlled by the frequency converter depending on the setting of parameter 1 9 25 Automatics selection By default the Autochange is activated for 2 drives See Figure 7 1 and Figure 7 4 Parameter 1 9 25 Autochange Interlockings Automatics Selection 0 Automatics autochange interlockings applied to auxiliary drives only The drive controlled by the frequency converter remains the same Therefore mains contactor is needed for one auxiliary drive only 1 All drives included in the autochange interlockings sequence The drive controlled by the frequency converter is included in the automatics and a contactor is needed for each drive to connect it to either the mains or the frequency converter Parameter 1 9 26 Autochange interval After the expiry of the time defined with this parameter the autochange function takes place if the capacity used lies below the level defined with parameters 1 9 28 Autochange frequency limit and 1 9 27 Maximum number of auxiliary drives Should the capacity exceed the value of P1 9 28 the autochange will not take place before the capacity goes below this limit e The time count is activated only if the Start Stop request is active at control place A e The time count is reset after the autochange h
27. Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Expander Boards Control Keypad Menu M6 The M6 menu shows the expander and option boards attached to the control board and board related information For more information see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual 3 14 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 ues Chapter 4 Multi Step Speed Control Application SVCHST04 Introduction MN04004001E Select the Multi Step Speed Control Application in menu M5 See Chapter 5 of the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual The Multi Step Speed Control Application can be used in applications where fixed speeds are needed Totally 15 2 different speeds can be programmed one basic speed 15 multi step speeds and one jogging speed The speed steps are selected with digital signals DIN3 DIN4 DIN5 and DING If jogging speed is used DIN3 can be programmed from fault reset to jogging speed select The basic speed reference can be either voltage or current signal via analog input terminals 2 3 or 4 5 The other one of the analog inputs can be programmed for other purposes e All outputs are freely programmable Additional functions e Programmable Start Stop and Reverse signal logic e Reference scaling e One frequency limit supervision e Second ramps and S shape ramp programming e Programmable start and stop functions e DC brake at stop e One pr
28. Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note Trial time P1 8 3 Start function 1 Flying start 2 According to par 1 4 6 P1 8 4 Number of tries after undervoltage trip P1 8 5 Number of tries after overvoltage trip P1 8 6 Number of tries after overcurrent trip P1 8 7 Number of tries after reference trip MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 3 13 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 3 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 Continued Code Parameter Mim Mex Unit Default Cust 10 Noe Number of tries after motor temp fault trip Number of tries after external fault trip Number of tries after underload fault trip Keypad Control Control Keypad Menu M2 The parameters for the selection of control place and direction on the keypad are listed below See the Keypad control menu in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Table 3 11 Keypad Control Parameters M2 mom uM m R2 2 Keypad Par 1 1 1 Par 1 1 2 reference ee 2 On idi 0 Forward ull L2 dl Reverse Stop button 0 Limited function of Stop button 1 Stop button always enabled System Menu Control Keypad Menu M5 For parameters and functions related to the general use of the drive such as application and language selection customized parameter sets or information about the hardware and software see
29. Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 2 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note Closed Loop Halal group 1 6 14 SPX only Continued P1 6 149 O speedtime atstart 0 32000 ms 100 ei PL amp TAiOOspeedtmeststop 0 92000 ms 00 886 P1 6 14 Start up torque le 0 Not used 1 Torque memory 2 Torque reference 3 Start up torque fwd rev PI amp TATZ SttupiorqusFWD 300 0 3000 s joo jess S TE Pi 6 14 18 Encoder fitertme o0 1000 fm ms fe P1 6 14 17 Current control 100 00 LM NN 00 _ P gain Advanced Open Loop parameter group 1 6 15 SPX only P1 6 15 1 Zero speed current 00 2500 1200 8 5 P1 6 15 2 Minimum current 00 1000 800 822 o PLGJ amp 3 Fluxreference 00 1000 800 8 88 F PL amp T amp 4 Frequencylimit 00 1000 200 835 o P1 6 155 WHzbos jo p bo ae Protections Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 7 Table 2 9 Protections G1 7 ee eee AN x P1 7 1 Response to 4 mA 0 No response reference fault 1 Warning 2 Warning Previous Freq 3 Wrng PresetFreq 1 7 2 4 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 mo Fault stop by coasting P1 7 2 4 mA reference fault Par 1 1 2 Hz frequency P1 7 3 Response to external 701 0 No response poses ff fpr 1 Wernin P1 7 4 Input phase 3 730 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 p mum
30. Figure 8 30 Place B Start Forward Start Reverse 0000 cee eee eee eee 8 34 Figure 8 31 Place B Start Stop Reverse 0 0 eee eee 8 34 Figure 8 32 Place B Start Pulse Stop Pulse ccc ee eee 8 35 Figure 8 33 PID Sum Point Reference 0 ccc eee eee 8 37 Figure 8 34 An Example of Joystick Hysteresis llle 8 38 Figure 8 35 Example of Sleep Limit Function llle 8 39 Figure 8 36 Joystick Hysteresis with Minimum Frequency at 35 Hz 8 40 Figure 8 37 Scaling of DC Braking Current 0 00 cece eee eee 8 41 IV For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 List of Figures continued Figure 8 38 Reducing Acceleration and Deceleration Times 8 42 Figure 8 39 Reducing Torque Supervision Limit llle 8 42 Figure 8 40 Digital Outputs 1 and 2 On and Off Delays lleenn 8 49 Figure 8 41 An Example of Adjust Input 0 0 0 eee ee eee 8 50 Figure 8 42 Acceleration Deceleration S shaped 000 eee eee eee eee 8 51 Figure 8 43 DC Braking Time when Stop Mode Coasting 8 53 Figure 8 44 DC Braking Time when Stop Mode Ramp 8 54 Figure 8 45 Example of Prohibit Frequency Area Setting Less 8 55 Figure 8 46 Ramp Speed Scaling between Prohibit Freq
31. From Forward to Reverse Analog Input V mA Min Freq ID101 0 10V 20 mA Ref Scaling Min ID303 0 Hz Joystick Hysteresis ID384 2096 Figure 8 34 An Example of Joystick Hysteresis In this example the value of ID385 Sleep limit 0 8 38 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 385 All sleep limit 6 P1 2 2 9 The frequency converter is automatically stopped if the Al signal level falls below the Sleep limit defined with this parameter See Figure 8 35 Frequency Reference Hz REVERSE FORWARD 50 50 Reference Scaling Max ID304 70 Hz From Reverse to Forward Max Freq ID102 50 Hz From Forward to Reverse Analog Input V mA Min Freq ID101 0 10V 20 mA Ref Scaling Min ID303 0 Hz Sleep Limit ID385 7 Joystick Hysteresis ID384 20 Figure 8 35 Example of Sleep Limit Function MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 39 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Frequency reference Hz REVERSE FORWARD 5096 5096 Reference Scaling Max P2 2 2 7 70 Hz From Reverse to Forward Max Freq P2 1 2 50 Hz From Forward to Reverse Analog Input V mA Min Freq P2 1 1 0 10V 20 mA Ref Scaling Min P2 2 2 6 0 Hz Joystick Hysteresis P2 2 2 8 2095 Figure 8 36 Joystick Hysteresis with Minimum Frequency at 35 Hz 386 All
32. G1 1 Continued Code Parameter Min Mex Unit Default Cust ID Ne P1 1 10 Power Factor 0 30 1 00 0 85 120 Check the rating plate of the motor P1 1 11 Local control place 1 3 2 171 1 1 0 Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus P1 1 12 Remote control 1 3 1 172 1 1 O Terminal place 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 14 173 0 AI 1 AI2 2 Al1 Al2 3 AI1 AI2 4 AI2 Al1 5 AI1xAI2 6 All Joystick 7 AI2 Joystick 8 Keypad 9 Fieldbus 10 Motor potentiometer 11 AI1 Al2 minimum 12 Al1 Al2 maximum 13 Max frequency 14 AI1 AI2 selection a o f Jv Par 1 1 2 10 00 105 Local reference C 0 00 0 00 0 00 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 P1 1 15 Preset speed 1 Par 112 Pe 100 ros Multistepspeed2 3 7 P1 1 21 Preset speed 7 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 9 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Input Signals Basic Settings Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 2 1 Table 6 4 Input Signals Basic Settings G1 2 1 Code parameter Wim Max Unit Default Gust D ne P1 2 1 1 Start Stop logic 7 300 Start signal 1 Start signal 2 selection Default Default DIN2 DIN1 Start forw Start rev Start Stop Reverse Start Stop Run enable Start pulse Stop pulse Start Mot pot UP Fwd pulse Rev pulse Start pulse Rev pulse Start pulse Enabl pulse P1 2 1 2 Motor 0 1 2000 0 Hz s 10 0 331 potentiome
33. MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 19 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Drive Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 4 Table 6 18 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 a OU TW NAR P1 4 1 Ramp 1 shape 500 0 Linear gt 0 S curve ramp time P1 4 2 Ramp 2 shape 0 501 0 Linear gt 0 S curve ramp time Praa pesionime unl 4 5 Brake 504 0 Disabled 1 Used when running 2 External brake chopper 3 Used when stopped running 4 Used when running no testing Pe 4 6 Start function 505 0 Ramp 1 Flying start re 4 7 Stop function 506 0 Coasting 1 Ramp 2 Ramp Run enable coast 3 Coast Run enable IEEE RE EE ee ee ee ee P1 4 9 DC braking time 600 00 508 0 DC brake is off at stop at stop P1 4 10 Frequency to start 0 10 10 00 515 DC braking during ramp stop P1 4 11 DC braking time 600 00 516 0 DC brake is off at start at start P1 4 12 Flux brake 1 520 0 Off 1 On P1 4 13 Flux braking 0 4xl 2xlgy 519 current 6 20 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Prohibit Frequency Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 5 Table 6 19 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 B Pene S m a ANE meow Prohibit frequency Par 1 5 2 509 0 Not used range 1 low limit Pio Prohibit frequency Par 1 1 2 510 0 Not used range 1 high limit P1 5 3 Prohibi
34. Motor Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 6 Table 4 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 C NE L 1800 NNNM P1 6 1 Motor control mode SVX 0 Frequency control 1 Speed control Additionally for SPX 2 Torque control 3 Closed loop speed ctrl 4 Closed loop torque ctrl 5 Adv open loop freq control 6 Advanced open loop speed control P1 6 2 V Hz optimization ie 0 Not used 1 Automatic torque boost P1 6 3 V Hzf ratio selection Ini 0 Linear 1 Squared 2 Programmable 3 Linear with flux optim PI 64 Field weakening point 8 00 32000 Hz 60 00 602 weakening point wr fe Sores frequency voltage Parameter max value par 1 6 5 CU femen ne n qm qe qum Do Emm frequency eee Tins es imeetveues n exact valles P1 6 10 Overvoltage controller 607 0 Not used 1 Used no ramping 2 Used ramping P1 6 11 Undervoltage 1 m 0 Not used controller m Used P1 6 12 Load Drooping 100 00 0 01 620 Drooping of nominal speed at nominal torque P1 6 13 Identification 1 631 0 Not used 1 Used 4 10 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 4 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Continued Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID_ Note Closed Loop parameter group 1 6 14 SPX only PI amp 141 Magnetizing current 000 10000 A 000 022 SS T6142
35. On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter groups The parameter descriptions are given in Chapter 8 Column explanations Code Location indication on the keypad Shows the operator the present parameter number Parameter Name of parameter Min Minimum value of parameter Max Maximum value of parameter Unit Unit of parameter value Given if available Default Value preset by factory Cust Customer s own setting ID D number of the parameter 2 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has been stopped Use TTF method to program these parameters See Page 6 3 Monitoring Values Control Keypad Menu M7 The monitoring values are the actual values of parameters and signals as well as statuses and measurements Monitoring values cannot be edited See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 for more information Table 1 2 Monitoring Values Output frequency Frequency reference Hz Hz rpm Jo Jo C Jo mA mA Output frequency to motor Frequency reference to motor control Motor speed in rpm In 96 of Motor nominal torque 1 2b 2 r 1 1 Motor shaft power Heatsink temperature Calculated motor temperature 1 A 0 0 V V 0 V Displays three selectable monitoring values 11 DIN4 DIN5 DIN6 DO1 RO1 RO2 V1 16 Analog lout M1 17 Multimonitoring items 5 7 13 14 15 16 17 6 2 MN04004001E For more information v
36. P1 2 7 9 P1 2 6 17 Contact closed Motor potentiometer reference INCREASES until the contact is opened Preset speed 1 6 P1 2 7 5 Preset speed 2 6 P1 2 7 6 Preset speed 3 6 P1 2 7 7 Parameter values are automatically limited between the minimum and maximum frequencies ID101 and ID102 AI1 AI2 selection 6 P1 2 7 17 This parameter is used to select either Al1 or Al2 signal as the frequency reference Start A signal 7 P1 2 6 1 Start command from control place A Default programming A 1 Start B signal 7 P1 2 6 2 Start command from control place B Default programming A 4 Control place A B selection 7 P1 2 6 3 Contact open Control place A Contact closed Control place B Default programming A 6 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 426 9 427 428 2 429 430 9 4319 432 433 2 434 9 435 9 436 Autochange 1 interlock 7 P1 2 6 18 Contact closed Interlock of autochange drive 1 or auxiliary drive 1 activated Default programming A 2 Autochange 2 interlock 7 P1 2 6 19 Contact closed Interlock of autochange drive 2 or auxiliary drive 2 activated Default programming A 3 Autochange 3 interlock 7 P1 2 6 20 Contact closed Interlock of autochange drive 3 or auxiliary drive 3 activated Autochange 4 interlock 7 P1 2 6 21 Contact closed Interlock o
37. R2 4 The PID controller keypad reference can be set between 0 and 100 This reference value is the active PID reference if ID332 2 R3 5 PID reference 2 57 R2 5 The PID controller keypa reference 2 can be set between 0 an 100 This reference is active if the DIN5 function 13 and the DIN5 contact is closed R3 5 Torque reference 6 R2 5 Defines the torque reference from 0 0 to 100 0 8 84 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Saar Appendix A Additional Information In this chapter you will find additional information on special parameter groups Such groups are e Parameters of External Brake Control with Additional Limits see below e Closed Loop Parameters see Page A 3 e Advanced Open Loop Parameters see Page A 3 e Parameters of Motor Thermal Protection see Page A 4 e Parameters of Stall Protection see Page A 4 e Parameters of Underload Protection see Page A 5 e Fieldbus Control Parameters see Page A 5 External Brake Control with Additional Limits ID315 ID316 ID346 to ID349 ID352 ID353 MN04004001E The external brake used for additional braking can be controlled through ID315 ID316 ID346 to ID349 and ID352 ID353 Selecting On Off Control for the brake defining the frequency or torque limit s the brake should react to and defining the Brake On Off delays will allow an effective brake control See F
38. Response to 3 2 701 0 No response external fault 1 Warning P174 Input phase 3 eee dn to 1 4 7 supervision Fault stop by coasting P1 7 5 Response to 3 undervoltage fault P1 7 6 Output phase 3 supervision P1 7 7 Earth fault 3 protection P1 7 8 Thermal 3 protection of the motor P1 7 9 Motor ambient 100 0 temperature factor P1 7 10 Motor cooling factor at zero speed 2 1 o 3 12 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 3 9 Protections G1 7 Continued Code Parameter Mim Mex Unit Default Cust 10 Note P1 7 13 Stall protection 3 709 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting PI734 Seewen 01 mo af 70 P715 Stlime mi 100 12000 fs ps0 UM Hz 0 1 1 0 10 0 limit P1 7 17 Underload 3 0 No response protection 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 18 Field weakening 150 area load P1 7 19 Zero frequency 5 load P1 7 20 Underload 2 20 protection time limit P1 7 21 Response to 3 2 732 0 No response thermistor fault 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 22 Response to 3 2 733 See P1 7 21 fieldbus fault fault Autorestart Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 8 Table 3 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 Code Parameter Cust
39. SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 710 Stall current limit 234567 P1 7 14 The current can be set to 0 1 Inmotor 2 For a stall stage to occur the current must have exceeded this limit See Figure 8 49 The software does not allow entering a greater value than Inmotor 2 If ID113 nominal motor current is changed this parameter is automatically restored to the default value IL See Page A 4 Stall Area Figure 8 49 Stall Characteristics Settings 711 Stall time 234567 P1 7 15 This time can be set between 1 0 and 120 0s This is the maximum time allowed for a stall stage The stall time is counted by an internal up down counter If the stall time counter value goes above this limit the protection will cause a trip see ID709 See Page A 4 Stall Time Counter Trip Area Trip Warning Figure 8 50 Stall Time Count MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 65 SPX9000 AF Drives 8 66 712 713 714 715 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Stall frequency limit 234567 P1 7 16 The frequency can be set between 1 fmax ID102 For a stall state to occur the output frequency must have remained below this limit See Page A 4 Underload protection 234567 P1 7 17 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting If tripping is set active the drive will stop and activate the fault stage De
40. T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 401 Reducing of acceleration and 6 P1 2 6 3 deceleration times See ID399 Acceleration and deceleration times can be reduced with the free analog input signal according to the following formulas Reduced time set acc deceler time ID103 ID104 ID502 ID503 divided by the factor R from Figure 8 38 Factor R Signal Range Figure 8 38 Reducing Acceleration and Deceleration Times 402 Reducing of torque supervision 6 P1 2 6 4 limit See ID399 The set torque supervision limit can be reduced with the free analog input signal between 0 and the set supervision limit ID349 See Figure 8 39 Torque Signal Range Figure 8 39 Reducing Torque Supervision Limit 8 42 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 403 9 404 405 9 406 407 408 9 409 4102 412 413 MN04004001E Start signal 1 6 P1 2 7 1 Signal selection 1 for the start stop logic Default programming A 1 Start signal 2 6 P1 2 7 2 Signal selection 2 for the start stop logic Default programming A 2 External fault close 67 P1 2 7 11 P1 2 6 4 Contact closed Fault is displayed and motor stopped External fault open 67 iP 2 7 12 P1 2 6 5 Contact open Fault is displayed and motor stopped Run enable 67 P1 2 7 3 P1 2 6 6 Contact open Start of motor disabled Contact closed
41. after undervoltage trip P1 8 5 Number of tries after overvoltage trip P1 8 6 Number of tries after overcurrent trip P1 8 7 Number of tries after reference trip P1 8 8 Number of tries after motor temperature fault trip Number of tries after external fault trip Number of tries after underload fault trip Fieldbus Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G7 9 Table 6 23 Fieldbus Parameters G1 9 ce ume m em e ooo es oe o Fui Ftcbusminseat eco sm re qom eso P1 9 2 Fieldbus max 320 00 851 scale P1 9 3 Fieldbus data out 1 10000 852 Choose monitoring data with selection parameter ID P1 9 4 Fieldbus data out 2 10000 2 853 Choose monitoring data with selection parameter ID P1 9 5 Fieldbus data out 3 10000 9 854 Choose monitoring data with selection parameter ID P1 9 6 Fieldbus data out 4 10000 855 Choose monitoring data with selection parameter ID P1 9 7 Fieldbus data out 5 10000 5 856 Choose monitoring data with selection parameter ID P1 9 8 Fieldbus data out 6 10000 857 Choose monitoring data with selection parameter ID MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 25 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 6 23 Fieldbus Parameters G1 9 Continued a m DIRMI TIN D P1 9 9 Fieldbus data out 7 10000 858 Choose monitoring data with selection parameter ID P1 9 10 Fieldbus data out 8 10000 859 Choose monitoring data with select
42. and option boards attached to the control board and board related information For more information see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 2 11 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 2 12 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 PAZ Chapter 3 Local Remote Control Application SVCHSTO3 Introduction Select the Local Remote Control Application in menu Mb See Chapter 5 of the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Utilizing the Local Remote Control Application it is possible to have two different control places For each control place the frequency reference can be selected from either the control keypad I O terminal or fieldbus The active control place is selected with the digital input DING All outputs are freely programmable Additional functions Programmable Start Stop and Reverse signal logic Reference scaling One frequency limit supervision Second ramps and S shape ramp programming Programmable start and stop functions DC brake at stop One prohibit frequency area Programmable U f curve and switching frequency Autorestart Motor thermal and stall protection Programmable action off warning fault The parameters of the Local Remote Control Application are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual The explanations are arranged according to the
43. closed start forward P DNZ Statreerss Contact closed start reverss 10 DIN3 External fault input Contact open no fault programmable Contact closed fault 11 CMA Common for DIN1 DIN3 Connect to GND or 24V 12 Control voltage output Voltage for switches see 6 13 I O ground Ground for reference and controls 14 DIN4 Multi step speed select 1 DIN4 DIN5 Frequency ref Ur OS 15 DIN5 Multi step speed select 2 Open Open Ref U Closed Open Multi step ref 1 Open Closed Multi step ref 2 Closed Closed RefMax 16 DIN6 Fault reset Contact open no action Contact closed fault reset 17 CMB Common for DIN4 DIN6 Connect to GND or 24V 18 AOl Output frequency Programmable AO1 Analog output Range 0 20 mA R max 500 19 AO 20 DO1 Digital output Programmable READY Open collector x 50 mA U lt 48V DC Relay output 1 RUN co vocet a coc Relay output 2 FAULT Note For more information on jumper selections see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 Jumper Block X3 CMA and CMB Grounding e e CMB connected to GND e CMA connected to GND ele CMB isolated from GND e CMA isolated from GND ele CMB and CMA internally connected together isolated from GND Factory default 1 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Basic Application Parameter Lists
44. drive available the latter will be put to use without stopping the frequency converter e lfthe interlock of the controlled drive is inactivated all motors will be stopped and re started with the new setup e lf the interlock is re activated in Run status the automatics functions according to parameter 1 9 23 Interlock selection 0 Not used 1 Update in stop Interlocks are used The new drive will be placed last in the autochange line without stopping the system However if the autochange order now becomes for example P1 P3 P4 gt P2 it will be updated in the next Stop autochange sleep stop etc Example P1 gt P3 gt P4 gt P2 LOCKED gt P1 gt P3 gt P4 gt P2 gt SLEEP gt P1 gt F2 gt P3 gt P4 2 Stop amp Update Interlockings are used The automatics will stop all motors immediately and re start with a new setup Example P1 gt P2 gt P4 gt P3 LOCKED gt STOP gt P1 gt P2 gt P3 gt P4 See Page 7 7 Examples 7 6 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Examples Pump and fan automatics with interlocks and no autochange Situation Phases 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 One controlled drive and three auxiliary drives Parameter settings 1 9 1 3 1 9 25 0 Interlock feedback signals used autochange not used Parameter settings 1 9 23 1 1 9 24 0 The interloc
45. from 0 to 100 342 PID reference fall time 57 P1 2 34 P1 2 1 7 Defines the time during which the PID controller reference falls from 100 to 0 344 Reference scaling minimum 57 iP 52 35 P1 2 1 18 value place B MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 27 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 345 Reference scaling maximum 57 P1 2 36 P1 2 1 19 value place B You can choose a scaling range for the frequency reference from control place B between the Minimum and Maximum frequency If no scaling is desired set the parameter value to 0 0 In Figure 8 23 input Al1 with signal range 0 100 is selected for Place B reference Output Output Frequency Frequency Max Frequency ID102 Max Frequency ID102 Analog Analog Min Frequency ID101 Input V Min Frequency ID101 Input V Figure 8 23 Control Place B with and without Reference Scaling Left ID344 0 No reference scaling Right reference scaling 346 Output freq limit 2 supervision 34567 iPT 3 12 P1 3 4 3 P 1 3 2 3 function 0 No supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision 3 Brake on control Application 6 only see Page A 1 4 Brake on off control Application 6 only see Page A 1 If the output frequency goes under over the set limit ID347 this function generates a warning message via the digital output DOT or relay outputs RO1 or RO2 depending on 1 the settings of ID312 to ID314
46. individual ID number of the parameter MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 3 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Control I O Table 3 1 Local Remote Application Default I O Configuration 1 10 kQ OPTA1 Reference output Voltage for potentiometer etc Place B input frequency reference 0 10V DC range 0 10V DC 4 Al2 Analog input current range Place A frequency reference 5 a2 0 20 mA range 0 20 mA Place A start forward Contact closed start forward programmable Place A start reverse Contact closed start reverse programmable External fault input Contact open no fault programmable Contact closed fault Common for DIN1 DIN3 Connect to GND or 24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches see terminal 6 I O ground Ground for reference and controls 14 DIN4 Place B start forward Contact closed start forward programmable 15 DIN5 Place B start reverse Contact closed start reverse programmable 16 DIN6 Place A B selection Contact open Place A is active Contact closed Place B is active 17 CMB Common for DIN4 DIN6 Connect to GND or 24V 18 AO14 Output frequency Programmable Analog output Range 0 20 mA RL max 5000 20 DO1 Digital output Programmable READY Open collector x 50 mA V 48V DC Relay output 1 Programmable Relay output 2 Programmable Note For more information on jumper selecti
47. inverted inversion 1 Inverted P1 3 5 5 Analog output 1 1 310 O OmA minimum 1 4mA P1 3 5 6 Analog output 1 10 1000 100 311 scale P1 3 5 7 Analog output 1 100 00 100 00 375 offset 6 18 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Analog Output 2 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 6 Table 6 16 Analog Output 2 Parameters G1 3 6 5e m n Na waMMUMR M P1 3 6 1 Analog output 2 471 signal selection P1 3 6 2 Analog output 2 472 See par 1 3 5 2 function P1 3 6 3 Analog output 2 10 00 1 00 473 0 No filtering filter time P1 3 6 4 Analog output 2 1 0 Not inverted inversion 1 Inverted P1 3 6 5 Analog output 2 1 minimum P1 3 6 6 Analog output 2 10 1000 A 100 scale P1 3 6 7 Analog output 2 100 00 100 00 A offset Analog Output 3 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 7 Table 6 17 Analog Output 3 Parameters G1 3 7 Code Parameter Mim Mex Unit Default Cust D Note P1 3 7 1 Analog output 3 0 1 478 signal selection P1 3 7 2 Analog output 3 13 5 479 See par 1 3 5 2 function P1 3 7 3 Analog output 3 10 00 1 00 480 0 No filtering filter time P1 3 7 4 Analog output 3 1 481 0 Not inverted inversion 1 Inverted 0 0mA 124 mA P1 3 7 6 Analog output 3 10 1000 A 100 scale P1 3 7 7 Analog output 3 100 00 100 00 A offset P1 3 7 5 Analog output 3 1 minimum
48. limit MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com A 3 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Parameters of Motor Thermal Protection ID704 to ID708 General The motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating The Cutler Hammer drive is capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor If the load requires this high current there is a risk that the motor will be thermally overloaded This is the case especially at low frequencies At low frequencies the cooling effect of the motor is reduced as well as its capacity If the motor is equipped with an external fan the load reduction at low speeds is small The motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the output current of the drive to determine the load on the motor The motor thermal protection can be adjusted with parameters The thermal current lT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded This current limit is a function of the output frequency The thermal stage of the motor can be monitored on the control keypad display See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 A CAUTION The calculated model does not protect the motor if the airflow to the motor is reduced by blocked air intake grill Parameters of Stall Protection A 4 ID709 to ID712 General The motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations such as one caused by a s
49. limit only the PID output no other outputs are affected MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 37 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 377 Al signal selection 234567 P1 2 8 P1 2 3 P1 2 15 P1 2 2 1 Connect the Al1 signal to the analog input of your choice with this parameter For more information about the TTF programming method see Page 6 3 384 A Al joystick hysteresis 6 P1 2 2 8 This parameter defines the joystick hysteresis between 0 and 20 When the joystick or potentiometer control is turned from reverse to forward the output frequency falls linearly to the selected minimum frequency joystick potentiometer in middle position and stays there until the joystick potentiometer is turned towards the forward command How much the joystick potentiometer must be turned to start the increase of the frequency towards the selected maximum frequency is dependent on the amount of joystick hysteresis defined with this parameter If the value of this parameter is 0 the frequency starts to increase linearly immediately when the joystick potentiometer is turned towards the forward command from the middle position When the control is changed from forward to reverse the frequency follows the same pattern the other way round See Figure 8 34 Frequency Reference Hz REVERSE FORWARD 50 50 Reference Scaling Max ID304 70 Hz From Reverse to Forward Max Freq ID102 50 Hz
50. more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 15 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 7 9 Input Signals Digital Inputs G1 2 6 Continued Code Parameter Min Max Unit etat Gwt b Noe P1 2 6 89 Control from DigIN 01 Digln E 10 DiglN 0 1 Force control place to keypad keypad Force cc 9 Local P1 2 6 99 Control from I O DiglN 01 Digln E 10 DiglN 0 1 Force control place to I O terminal Force terminal cc 9 Remote P1 2 6 10 2 Reverse DigIN 01 Digln E 10 DigIN 0 1 412 Direction forward oc 9 Direction reverse cc 9 P1 2 6 112 Jogging speed DigIN 01 Digln E 10 DigIN A 5 413 Jogging speed selected for frequency reference cc 9 P1 2 6 12 DigIN 01 Digin E 10 DigIN 0 1 Jaa All faults reset cc P1 2 6 132 Acc Dec prohibit DigIN 01 DigIn E 10 DigIN 0 1 Acc Dec prohibited cc P1 2 6 14 DC braking DigIN 01 DigIn E 10 DigIN 0 1 DC braking active cc 1 2 6 15 Motor DigIN 01 Digln E 10 DiglN 0 1 417 Motor potentiometer reference potentiometer reference DOWN decreases cc 9 P1 2 6 16 2 Motor DigIN 01 Digln E 10 potentiometer reference UP DiglN 0 1 418 Motor potentiometer reference increases cc 9 P1 2 6 17 2 Autochange 1 DigIN 01 Digln E 10 DigIN A 2 426 Activated if cc 9 Interlock P1 2 6 18 Autochange 2 DigIN 01 Digln E 10 i Interlock P1 2 6 19 Autochange 3 DiglN 01 Digln E 10 Interlock P1 2
51. optimization qe 0 Not used 1 Automatic torque boost P1 6 3 V Hz ratio selection 0 Linear 1 Squared 2 Programmable 3 Linear with flux optim EE V Pra Field weakening point 800 320 00 Hz e000 jeu weakening pot frequency P1 6 7 V Hz curve midpoint 100 00 ul 00 _ ee XU ee voltage Parameter max value par 2 6 5 P1 6 8 Output voltage at zero 40 00 908 Ims Xx mew frequency P1 6 9 Switching frequency Varies kHz Varies mad ii NNNM Table 8 12 on Page 8 57 for exact values P1 6 10 Overvoltage controller 2 1 607 0 Not used 1 Used no ramping 2 Used ramping P1 6 11 Undervoltage 1 1 608 0 Not used controller 1 Used P1 6 12 Load Drooping 100 00 0 01 620 Drooping of nominal speed at nominal torque P1 6 13 Identification 1 631 0 Not used 1 Used Closed Loop parameter group 1 6 14 SPX only P1 6 14 1 Magnetizing current 000 10000 A 099 ei SCS P1 6 14 2 Speed controiP gain 0 1000 lo m PL amp T43 Speedconroiltme 09 5000 ms 900 lea PL amp 3A4 Load drooping 0 00 10000 looo 8200 o P1 6 14 5 Acceleration 300 00 626 compensation Premas S padst Jo 800 X mo em P1 6 14 7 Magnetizing current at MotCurr MotCurr A 627 start Min Max P1 6 14 8 Magnetizing time at 600 0 628 start 2 8 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N
52. output 3 100 00 100 00 484 offset 7 20 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Drive Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 4 Table 7 15 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 ee NL P1 4 1 Ramp 1 shape 500 0 00 Linear gt 0 00 S curve ramp time P1 4 2 Ramp 2 shape 501 0 00 Linear gt 0 00 S curve as time P1 43 A Mu Acceleration time 2 time 2 01 1 30000 0 s 10 0 0 si E 450 Brake chopper m Disabled 1 Used when running 2 External brake chopper 3 Used when stopped running 4 Used when running no testing pes 4 6 Start mode 505 0 Ramp 1 Flying start indi 4 7 Stop mode 506 0 Coasting 1 Ramp 2 Ramp Run enable coast 3 Coast Run enable P1 4 9 DC braking time at 600 00 stop P1 4 10 Frequency to start 10 00 1 50 DC braking during ramp stop 515 NE 00 DC brake is off at start pet P1 4 11 DC braking time 600 00 at start P1 4 12 Flux brake a MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 21 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Skip Frequencies Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 5 Table 7 16 Skip Frequencies G1 5 Code Parameter Mim Max Unt Default Cust ID Note P1 5 1 Skip frequency P1 5 2 Hz 509 range 1 low limit P1 5 2 Skip frequency P1 5 1 320 00 510 0 00 No proh
53. outputs of the frequency converter Local amp Remote Control Place The active control place can be changed by pressing the LOC REM button on the keypad There are two different places which the frequency converter can be controlled from Local and Remote For each control place the actual control source is selected with this parameter a different symbol will appear on the alphanumeric display Table 8 5 Selections for ID171 and ID172 Contro soure Symbol T o NN ss Local amp Remote reference 234567 amp 174 selection Defines which frequency reference source is selected when controlled from the keypad For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 9 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 8 6 Selections for ID173 ID174 and ID175 Application Select 7 Analog voltage ref Analog voltage ref Analog voltage ref Analog voltage ref Terminals 2 3 Terminals 2 3 Terminals 2 3 Terminals 2 3 Analog current ref Analog current ref Analog current ref Analog current ref Terminals 4 5 Terminals 4 5 Terminals 4 5 Terminals 4 5 Keypad reference AI3 AI1 Al2 Al3 Menu M2 Keypad reference Al2 Al1 Keypad reference potentiometer Menu M2 Menu M2 App 3 only Fieldbus All x Al2 Fieldbus reference reference PID controller ref Al2 joystick PID controller ref Keypad reference Menu M2 Fieldbus reference Potentiometer reference contr
54. sets for one application The active set can be selected with the programmable signal DIN3 ID301 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 51 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 504 Brake chopper 234567 P1 4 5 0 No brake chopper used 1 Brake chopper in use and tested when running Can be tested also in READY state 2 External brake chopper no testing 3 Used and tested in READY state and when running 4 Used when running no testing When the frequency converter is decelerating the motor the inertia of the motor and the load is fed into an external brake resistor This enables the frequency converter to decelerate the load with a torque equal to that of acceleration provided that the correct brake resistor has been selected See the separate Brake resistor installation manual 505 Start Function P1 4 6 Ramp 0 The frequency converter starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequency within the set acceleration time Load inertia or starting friction may cause prolonged acceleration times Flying start 1 The frequency converter is able to start into a running motor by applying a small torque to motor and searching for the frequency corresponding to the speed the motor is running at Searching starts from the maximum frequency towards the actual frequency until the correct value is detected Thereafter the output frequency will be increased decreased to the set re
55. starts The braking time is defined with ID508 If high inertia exists it is recommended to use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration See Figure 8 44 ae Motor Speed Output Frequency DC Braking t ID508 RUN STOP Figure 8 44 DC Braking Time when Stop Mode Ramp 8 54 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 509 Prohibit frequency area 1 234567 P1 5 1 Low limit 510 Prohibit frequency area 1 234567 P1 5 2 High limit 511 Prohibit frequency area 2 34567 1 5 3 Low limit 512 Prohibit frequency area 2 34567 P1 5 4 High limit 513 Prohibit frequency area 3 34567 P1 5 5 Low limit 514 Prohibit frequency area 3 34567 P1 5 6 High limit In some systems it may be necessary to avoid certain frequencies because of mechanical resonance problems With these parameters limits are set for the skip frequency regions See Figure 8 45 Output Frequency Hz ID303 ID510 ID511 ID512 ID513 1D514 Reference Hz Figure 8 45 Example of Prohibit Frequency Area Setting 515 DC braking frequency at stop 234567 P1 4 10 The output frequency at which the DC braking is applied See Figure 8 45 516 DC braking time at start 234567 P1 4 11 DC brake is activated when the start command is given This parameter defines the time before the brake is released After the brake is released the output
56. you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter groups The parameter descriptions are given in Chapter 8 Column explanations Code Location indication on the keypad Shows the operator the present parameter number Parameter Name of parameter Min Minimum value of parameter Max Maximum value of parameter Unit Unit of parameter value Given if available Default Value preset by factory Cust User s customized setting ID D number of the parameter for reference to Chapter 8 2 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has been stopped Programmed using terminal to function TTF method See Page 6 3 Monitoring Values Control Keypad Menu M68 The monitoring values are the actual values of parameters and signals as well as statuses and measurements Monitoring values cannot be edited See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 for more information Note that the monitoring values V1 18 to V1 23 are available in the PFC control application only Table 7 2 Monitoring Values T Output frequency Frequency reference Motor speed Motor current Motor torque Motor power For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 7 2 Monitoring Values Continued V1 17 Analog input 4 V1 18 PID Reference V1 19 PID Actual value ib bee Ooo 21 In 96 of the max actual value V1 20 PID Error
57. 0 Table 6 6 Analog Input 2 Parameters G1 2 3 lecce 6 11 Table 6 7 Analog Input 3 Parameters G1 2 4 llle 6 12 Table 6 8 Analog Input 4 Parameters G1 2 5 0 0 ees 6 12 Table 6 9 Free Analog Input Signal Selection G1 2 6 0 0002 eee ees 6 13 Table 6 10 Digital Input Signals G1 2 7 llle 6 13 Table 6 11 Delayed Digital Output 1 Parameters G1 3 1 eee ees 6 15 Table 6 12 Delayed Digital Output 2 Parameters G1 3 2 lesen 6 15 Table 6 13 Digital Output Signals G1 3 3 clle 6 16 Table 6 14 Limit Settings G1 3 4 llle 6 17 Table 6 15 Analog Output 1 Parameters G1 3 5 celles 6 18 Table 6 16 Analog Output 2 Parameters G1 3 6 0 00 cece ees 6 19 Table 6 17 Analog Output 3 Parameters G1 3 7 llle 6 19 Table 6 18 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 leeeeee nn 6 20 Table 6 19 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 0 0 0 cee ees 6 21 Table 6 20 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 eee eee ees 6 21 vi For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 List of Tables continued Table 6 21 Protections G1 7 0 0c ee eee eas 6 23 Table 6 22 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 clle 6 25 Table 6 23 Fieldbus Parameters G1 9
58. 0 102 NOTE If fmax gt than the motor synchronous speed check suitability for motor and drive system 1 3000 0 s 30 0 1 s so P1 1 3 Acceleration time 1 3000 0 P1 1 4 Deceleration time 1 3000 0 PLIS Curenlimi 04x 2x 0 4 x ty NM P1 1 66 Nominal voltage of the 180 V SPX2 230V 110 motor SPX4 460V SPXb 690V P1 1 7 Nominal frequency of 30 00 320 00 Hz 60 00 111 Check the rating plate of the CUM emot s 00 PER M o motor ren P1 1 8 Nominal speed of the 300 20 000 rpm 1720 112 The default applies for a motor 4 pole motor and a nominal size frequency converter P1 1 9 Nominal current ofthe 0 4xly 2xIy A 113 Check the rating plate of the P meer e erm nS A IM oo motor en Ir motor P1 1 11 Local control place 3 1 171 1 I O Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus P1 1 12 Remote control place e E B P1 1 13 Local control reference 3 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus P1 1 14 Remotes control 3 0 Al1 reference 1 Al2 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus PTIT Jogging speed pret 000 Patrz o0 pa SSCS P1 1 16 Preset speed 1 0 00 Par 1 1 2 Hz 5 00 105 Multi step speed 1 P1 1 17 Preset speed 2 0 00 Par 1 1 2 10 00 106 Multi step speed 2 P1 1 18 Preset speed 3 0 00 Par 1 1 2 12 50 NEN 126 Multi step speed 3 P1 1 19 Preset speed 4 000 Par 1 1 2 15 00 P 127 Multi step speed 4 P1 1 20 Preset speed 5 0 00 Par 1 1 2 17 50 a 128 Multi step spe
59. 00 30 1 1 1 172 1 I O Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 11 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 7 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Continued ze e NC UNE ONE P1 1 13 Local control 173 reference 4 Keypad reference 5 Fieldbus reference 6 Motor potentiometer 7 PID controller P1 1 14 Remote control reference 4 Keypad reference 5 Fieldbus reference 6 Motor potentiometer 7 PID controller P1 1 15 PID controller 332 reference signal Place A 4 Keypad reference 5 Fieldbus reference 6 Motor potentiometer LL ro contr ina as osi s 8 fie P1 1 18 PID controller D 10 00 132 time z P1120 Sleepdelay fo 3990 fs fo po pizi waew fo NO30 e 0 fo ooo P1 1 22 Wake up action 1019 0 Wake up when below wake up level P1 1 21 1 Wake up at when above wake up level P1 1 21 2 Wake up when below wake up level PID ref 3 Wake up when above wake up level PID ref P1 1 23 Jogging speed P1 1 2 10 00 124 reference 7 12 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Input Signals Basic Settings Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 2 1 Table 7 4 Input Signals Basic Settings G1 2 1 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust D P1 2 1 1 PID Reference 2 7 7 371 4 PID r
60. 004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 6 20 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Continued Code parameter Mi Max Unit Default Cust D Note Advanced Open Loop parameter group 1 6 18 SPX only prsna Zerospeedcurenoo o0 p m F862 Minimumourent 00 Wo x mo e prema Fuxrference foo wn fo 99 Prema Freqwencytimt 00 ws ao 85 Pres Vizboot foi S p RE Protections Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 7 Table 6 21 Protections G1 7 Code Parameter Mi Max Unt Default Cust D Note P1 7 1 Response to 4mA 5 700 0 No response reference fault 1 Warning 2 Warning Previous Freq 3 Wrng PresetFreq 1 7 2 4 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 5 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 2 4mA reference Par 1 1 2 Hz 728 fault frequency P1 7 3 Response to 3 2 701 0 No response external fault 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 supervision P1 7 5 Response to 1 3 2 727 undervoltage fault P1 7 6 Output phase 3 2 702 supervision P1 7 7 Earth fault 3 2 703 protection Thermal 3 2 704 protection of the motor P1 7 9 Motor ambient 100 0 100 0 705 temperature factor P1 7 10 Motor cooling factor at zero speed P1 7 11 Motor thermal 1 time constant P1 7 12 Motor duty cycle oO 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting 0 No response PT 7 13 Stall protection 00 100 P1 7 14 Stall current
61. 06 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting Setting the parameter to 0 will deactivate the protection Response to fieldbus fault 234567 P1 7 22 This sets the response mode for the fieldbus fault when a fieldbus board is used For more information see the respective Fieldbus Board Manual See ID732 Response to slot fault 234567 P1 7 23 This sets the response mode for a board slot fault caused by a missing or failed board See ID732 Automatic restart Number of 234567 P1 8 10 tries after underload fault trip This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the trial time set by ID718 0 No automatic restart after an Underload fault trip gt 0 Number of automatic restarts after an Underload fault trip Number of PT100 inputs in use 567 P1 7 24 If a PT 100 input board is installed in the frequency converter this sets the number of PT100 inputs in use See the 9000X Option Board User Manual Note If the selected value is greater than the actual number of PT100 inputs being used the display will read 200 C If the input is short circuited the displayed value is 30 C Response to PT100 fault 567 P1 7 25 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting PT100 warning limit 567 P1 7 26 Set here the limit at which the PT100 warning will be activated PT100 fault limit 567 P1 7 27 Set here the l
62. 1 P1 7 15 Stall time limit 1 00 120 00 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 23 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 6 21 Protections G1 7 Continued E Dee ee I 2 P1 7 16 Stall frequency Par 1 1 2 712 limit Underload 713 0 No response protection 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 18 Field weakening 150 0 714 area load P1 7 19 Zero frequency 150 0 715 load P1 7 20 Underload 2 00 600 00 m 00 716 protection time limit P1 7 21 Response to 0 No response thermistor fault 1 Warning P1 7 22 Response to fieldbus fault 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 24 No of PT 100 inputs P1 7 25 Response to PT100 fault P1 7 26 PT100 warning 200 0 limit P1 7 27 PT100 fault limit 30 0 200 0 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 23 Response to slot fault C C 6 24 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Autorestart Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 8 Table 6 22 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 Code Parameter Mm Max Unt Default Cust D Note Piet wame oro oo s feo wf P2 mame 00 90 s fom 7 P1 8 3 Start mode 0 Ramp 1 Flying start 2 According to par 1 4 6 P1 8 4 Number of tries
63. 11 Reference Inversion celle hrs 8 16 Figure 8 12 Reference Filtering usuaduirsscabeebsez E ende web c3 SE ES md Red ewes 8 16 Figure 8 13 Analog Output Filtering 0 00 Rs 8 17 Figure 9 14 Analog Output Invert dessus 40 de bee AE REGERE ed ee IER ERES 8 17 Figure 8 15 Analog Output Scaling lllleeeeeeeee eee 8 18 Figure 8 16 Output Frequency Supervision see 8 20 Figure 8 17 DC Braking Command Selection 12 Selected for DIN2 8 22 Figure 8 18 All No Signal Inversion uis 2 s0eu 208 b5 S4ede8e4ee io idee bbe ieee eos 8 23 Figure 8 19 AI1 Signal Inversion 0 00 cc ee ee ee eee 8 23 Figure 8 20 AIT Signal Filtering uude urs pebxeE m Eun ba 3 eed s EE banded 8 24 Figure 8 21 Analog Input AI2 Scaling 0 0 ccc eee es 8 24 Figure 8 22 Examples of Actual Value Signal Scaling 0 000 e eee eee 8 27 Figure 8 23 Control Place B with and without Reference Scaling 8 28 Figure 8 24 External Brake Control 624 08 es ne E E EP ES Emm mx densidad 8 30 Figure 8 25 An Example of On Off Control llle 8 31 Figure 8 26 Scaling of Max Motor Current eese nn 8 32 Figure 8 27 Reduction of DC Braking Current seen 8 32 Figure 8 28 Reduction of Acceleration and Deceleration Eu S TTPTT v 8 33 Figure 8 29 Reduction of Torque Supervision Limit ee eee ees 8 33
64. 12 Mot regulator active 13 OP freq limit 1 superv 14 Remote Control Active 15 Thermistor fault warng 16 Fieldbus input data 16 09 m Same as parameter 1 3 7 2 315 0 No limit 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision eee Pee 0 1 471 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 474 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 475 020mA 1 4mA meee P1 3 8 Relay output 1 function P1 3 9 Relay output 2 function P1 3 10 Output frequency limit 1 supervision P1 3 11 Output frequency limit 1 Supervised value P1 3 12 Analog output 2 signal selection P1 3 13 Analog output 2 function P1 3 14 Analog output 2 filter time P1 3 15 Analog output 2 inversion P1 3 16 Analog output 2 minimum P1 3 17 Analog output 2 10 scaling 1 1 O je Pu O For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Drive Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 4 Table 2 6 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 See eee NR 5 P1 4 1 Ramp 1 shape 500 0 Linear gt 0 S curve ramp time P1 4 2 Ramp 2 shape 501 0 Linear gt 0 S curve steuern ime time P143 4 3 Accelergtion Hume 2 0 1 30000 0 s 100 0 502 Praa Deceersontims2 01 39008 s 88 889 m 4 5 o6 Brake chopper 504 0 Disabled 1 Used when running 2 External brake chopper 3 Used when sto
65. 2 X5 2 3 Figure 6 4 System Bus Physical Connections with the OPT D2 Board MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 5 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 a E e GLAD RUNE Gn um EE a GEIL e GU NUES Gn TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX 1 1 2 2 TIS pL 1 1 2 2 111 2 42 Figure 6 5 System Bus Physical Connections with the OPT D1 Board OPT 2 Expander Board Menu SBCRCErrorCounter Indicates the number of CRC errors in the communication SBOk Indicator SystemBus working properly SBlnUse Parameter for activating SystemBus communication 0 Not in use 1 Communication activated SBld Drive number in SystemBus line Use 1 for Master or the same ID as in CAN line SBNextld Next Drive number in SystemBus line SBSpeed Parameter for the selection of SystemBus speed 6 6 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Multi Purpose Control Application Parameter Lists On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter groups The parameter descriptions are given in Chapter 8 Column explanations Code Location indication on the keypad Shows the operator the present parameter number Parameter Name of parameter Min Minimum value of parameter Max Maximum value of parameter Uni
66. 2 31 With these parameters you can set the minimum and maximum limits for the PID controller output Limit setting 1000 0 of fmax ID359 ID360 1000 0 of fmax These limits are of importance for example when you define the gain I time and D time for the PID controller Free analog input signal 34 P1 2 20 P1 2 17 selection Selection of input signal for the free analog input an input not used for a reference signal 0 Not in use 1 Voltage signal Vin 2 Current signal lin Free analog input function 34 iP 1 2 21 P 1 2 19 This parameter is used for selecting a function for the free analog input signal 0 Function is not in use 1 Reduces motor current limit ID107 This signal will adjust the maximum motor current between 0 and maximum limit set with ID107 See Figure 8 26 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 31 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Torque Limit 100 ID107 0V Signal Range 0 mA 4 mA Custom Custom Figure 8 26 Scaling of Max Motor Current 2 Reduces DC braking current DC braking current can be reduced with the free analog input signal between current 0 4 x ly and the current set with ID507 See Figure 8 27 DC Braking 100 ID507 Free Analog 0 15xl Input Signal Range Figure 8 27 Reduction of DC Braking Current 3 Reduces acceleration and deceleration times Acceleration and deceleration times can be reduced wit
67. 234567 P1 3 17 P1 3 27 P1 3 6 6 P1 3 4 6 For more information on these five parameters see the corresponding parameters for the analog output 1 ID307 to ID311 Analog output 2 offset 67 P1 3 6 7 P1 3 4 7 Add 100 0 to 100 096 to the analog output Analog output 3 signal 67 iP 1 3 7 T P 1 3 5 1 selection See ID464 Analog output 3 function 67 P1 3 7 2 P1 3 5 2 See ID307 Analog output 3 filter time 67 P 1 3 7 3 P 1 3 5 3 See ID308 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 481 Analog output 3 inversion 67 P1 3 7 4 P1 3 5 4 See ID309 482 Analog output 3 minimum 67 P 1 37 5 P 1 3 5 5 See ID310 483 Analog output 3 scaling 67 P1 3 7 6 P1 3 5 6 See ID311 484 Analog output 3 offset 67 P1 3 7 7 P1 3 5 7 See ID375 485 Torque limit 6 P1 2 6 5 See ID399 for the selections 486 Digital output 1 signal 6 P 1 3 1 1 selection 6 Connect the delayed DO1 signal to the digital output of your choice with this parameter For more information about the TTF programming method see Page 6 3 487 Digital output 1 on delay 6 P1 3 1 3 488 Digital output 1 off delay 6 P1 3 1 4 With these parameters you can set on and off delays for digital outputs Signal Programmed o ooo Lo to Digital Output DO1 or DO2 Output a d T Lo ON Delay OFF Delay Figure 8 40 Digital Outputs 1 and 2 On and Off Delays 4
68. 3 6 Analog output 10 1000 scale P1 3 3 7 100 00 100 00 309 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 310 0 20mA 124 mA moo 0 s p MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 19 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Analog Output 2 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 4 Table 7 13 Output Signals Analog Output 2 G1 3 4 Code Parameter Mim Max Umt Defaut Cust DD Note P1 3 4 1 Analog output 2 AnOUT 01 AnOUT E 10 AnOUT 0 1 471 signal selection P1 3 4 2 Analog output 2 14 472 See P1 3 3 2 function P1 3 4 3 Analog output 2 1 00 473 0 00 No filtering filter time P1 3 4 4 Analog output 2 474 0 Not inverted inversion 1 Inverted P1 3 4 5 Analog output 2 1 minimum E 1 476 475 0 0mA 1 4mA P1 3 4 6 Analog output 2 scale P1 3 4 7 Analog output 2 100 00 100 00 477 offset Analog Output 3 Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 3 5 Table 7 14 Output Signals Analog Output 3 G1 3 5 Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust ID Note P1 3 5 1 Analog output 3 AnOUT 01 AnOUT E 10 AnOUT 0 1 478 signal selection P1 3 5 2 Analog output 3 14 479 See P1 3 3 2 function P1 3 5 3 Analog output 3 10 00 1 00 480 10 00 No filtering filter time P1 3 5 4 Analog output 3 1 481 0 Not inverted Inversion 1 Inverted P1 3 5 5 Analog output 3 1 482 0 OmA minimum 124mA P1 3 5 6 Analog output 3 10 1000 100 483 scale P1 3 5 7 Analog
69. 3 Al3 4 Al4 5 Fieldbus Actual value 1 FBProcessDatalN2 Actual value 2 FBProcessDatalN3 Application 5 6 Motor torque 7 Motor speed 8 Motor current 9 Motor power 10 Encoder frequency for Actual value 1 only 336 Actual value 1 minimum scale 57 P1 2 11 P 1 2 1 11 Sets the minimum scaling point for Actual value 1 See Figure 8 22 337 Actual value 1 maximum scale 57 P1 2 12 P1 2 1 12 Sets the maximum scaling point for Actual value 1 See Figure 8 22 338 Actual value 2 minimum scale 57 P1 2 13 P1 2 1 13 Sets the minimum scaling point for Actual value 2 See Figure 8 22 339 Actual value 2 maximum scale 57 P1 2 14 P1 2 1 14 Sets the maximum scaling point for Actual value 2 See Figure 8 22 8 26 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Scaled Scaled Input Signal 96 Input Signal 96 100 ID336 30 ID337 80 76 5 15 3 MA 1D338 30 ID339 14096 Analog Analog 100 Input i 100 140 Input 96 Figure 8 22 Examples of Actual Value Signal Scaling 340 PID error value inversion 57 iP 1 2 32 FP 1 2 1 5 This parameter allows you to invert the error value of the PID controller and thus the operation of the PID controller 0 No inversion 1 Inverted 341 PID reference rise time 57 P1 2 33 P1 2 1 6 Defines the time during which the PID controller reference rises
70. 3 and 6 4 DIN1 closed contact start forward DIN2 closed contact reference increases motor potentiometer reference this parameter is automatically set to 4 if ID174 is set to 3 or 4 5 DIN1 closed contact start forward Rising edge required to start DIN2 closed contact start reverse Rising edge required to start 6 DIN1 closed contact start Rising edge required to start open contact stop DIN2 closed contact reverse open contact forward 7 DIN1 closed contact start Rising edge required to start open contact stop DIN2 closed contact start enabled open contact start disabled and drive stopped if running Application 3 8 DIN1 closed contact start forward Rising edge required to start DIN2 closed contact reference increases motor potentiometer reference this parameter is automatically set to 4 if ID174 is set to 3 or 4 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 13 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 301 DINS function 12345 IPLTZ P1 2 2 0 Not used 1 External fault closing contact Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is active 2 External fault opening contact Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is not active 3 Run enable contact open Motor start disabled and the motor is stopped contact closed Motor start enabled Application 1 4 Run enable contact open Motor start enabled contact closed Mo
71. 31 AED Al Ref Faul Warn P AI Ref Faul Warn A AI Ref Faul Warn DigOUT 0 0 gt DigOUT 0 0 gt DigOUT A T gt Figure 6 2 Defining Input Output Values MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 3 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Defining a Terminal for a Certain Function with 9000X Drive Programming Tool If you use the 9000X Drive Programming Tool for parametrizing you will have to establish the connection between the function and input output in the same way as with the control panel Just pick the address code from the drop down menu in the Value column see Figure 6 3 E Parameter Window LOADED Compare G 2 25 ANALOG INPUT 4 Index Variable Test Value Defaut Unt Min Max f G 2 2 6 DIGITAL INPUTS 3 1 Faut ana i TEE DUET EUM a EA 315 Waning igDUT 0 DigDUT 0 1 DISDUT E 10 ci c G 2 3 1 DIG OUT SIGNALS 3 1 6 External Fault 0 DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 P 2 3 1 1 Ready 2 3 1 7 Al Ref Faul wam DigQUT 0 1 DigQUT E 10 P 2 3 1 2 Run P 2 3 1 3 Fault P 2 3 1 4 Fault Inverted P 2 3 1 5 Warning P 2 3 1 6 External Fault P 2 3 1 8 OverT emp Warn P 2 3 1 9 Reserved P 2 3 1 10 Direct Differenc 3 P231 11 At Ref Speed P2 31 12 Jogging Speed P231 13ExtControl Place P 2 3 1 14 Ext Brake Contrl P2 31 15 ExtBrakeCtil In a P 2 3 1 16 FreqQut SupvLim1 P 2 3 1 1 FreqQut SupvLim2 P 2 3 1 18 Ref
72. 314 Same as parameter 1 3 7 function MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 9 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 5 5 Output Signals G1 3 Continued Code Parameter Mm Me Unit Default Gust D Noe P1 3 10 Output frequency 2 315 0 No limit limit 1 supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision P1 3 11 Output frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz 316 limit 1 Supervised value P1 3 12 Output frequency 2 346 0 No limit limit 2 supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision Output frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz 347 limit 2 Supervised value Torque limit 2 348 0 Not used supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision P1 3 15 Torque limit l supervision value P1 3 16 Reference limit supervision P1 3 13 P1 3 14 Reference limit supervision value P1 3 18 External brake off delay P1 3 19 External brake on delay P1 3 17 P1 3 20 FC temperature supervision P1 3 21 FC temperature supervised value 1 Low limit 2 High limit 0 1 471 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 P1 3 25 Analog output 2 474 0 Not inverted Inversion 1 Inverted P1 3 26 Analog output 2 1 475 0 0mA minimum 1 4mA P1 3 27 Analog output 2 10 1000 A 100 476 scaling P1 3 229 Analog output 2 signal selection P1 3 23 Analog output 2 function P1 3 24 Analog output 2 filter time Ol 10 Fo
73. 4 1 Manege elt ede pA E REERTSTTLIIT OTI TIT OQ eee eee eee eee eee 4 1 COMIFON s 4 2 Multi Step Speed Control Application Parameter Lists 4 3 CHAPTER 5 PID CONTROL APPLICATION SVCHST05 5 1 Int FOOD HO rssi 424 06 2 25 noe ERRARE AERE URN IP ene EN EPS NU SE ded 5 1 CONTONW nos Eu RREAICRERASAGEEEISUARAGUAERIGRAEAER REA EG USERS EE 5 2 PID Control Application Parameter ListS 000 e eee eee ees 5 3 CHAPTER 6 MULTI PURPOSE CONTROL APPLICATION SVCHST06 6 1 jeyigejeiz ie die DER RIT TOT TIL DOCTI OD IIT ee ne ee See 6 1 CONT Ol VO TC 6 2 Terminal To Function TTF Programming Principle llle 6 3 Master Follower Function SPX Only leere III 6 5 Multi Purpose Control Application Parameter Lists lle 6 7 Ip SIM alSs 2524 5 2 122 beet ee 5 3 21 8 boats EORR dU D OP UU cba RR tees eder 6 10 Oti SION als 4 oe ene eee duets wus Sede PUER E B dris Eu acie Ei ag Mu 6 15 CHAPTER 7 PUMP AND FAN CONTROL APPLICATION ASFIFF07 7 1 lugere 4 2424440444005402 8 hag8ebaghe ed eeae net ea eee peed eee ose 7 1 Geld iio rrr 7 2 Short Description of Function and Essential Parameters 7 5 Pump and Fan Control Application Parameter Lists 00000 ees 7 10 Input Signals 42622 b2544083640665 odes en
74. 4719 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Autochange 4 Auxiliary drive 4 7 P1 3 1 30 control Control signal for autochange auxiliary drive 4 If three or more auxiliary drives are used we recommend the use of relay outputs to connect drives 3 and 4 Since the OPTA2 board only has two relay outputs it is advisable to purchase an I O expander board with extra relay outputs e g OPTB5 Autochange 5 control 7 P1 3 1 31 Control signal for autochange drive 5 Analog input supervision limit 67 P1 3 3 22 P1 3 1 22 The selected analog input signal is beyond the set supervision limits see ID372 ID373 and ID374 Analog output 1 signal 234567 P1 3 1 P1 3 5 1 P1 3 3 1 selection Connect the AO 1 signal to the analog output of your choice with this parameter For more information about the TTF programming method see Page 6 3 Analog output 2 signal 234567 P1 3 12 P1 3 22 P1 3 6 1 P1 3 4 1 selection Connect the AO2 signal to the analog output of your choice with this parameter For more information about the TTF programming method see Page 6 3 Analog output 2 function 234567 P1 3 13 P1 3 23 P1 3 6 2 P1 3 4 2 Analog output 2 filter time 234567 P1 3 14 P1 3 24 P1 3 6 3 P1 3 4 3 Analog output 2 inversion 234567 P1 3 15 P1 3 25 P1 3 6 4 P1 3 4 4 Analog output 2 minimum 234567 P1 3 16 P1 3 26 P 1 3 6 5 P1 3 4 5 Analog output 2 scaling
75. 5 Control I O Table 5 1 PID Application Default I O Configuration with 2 wire transmitter Reference potentiometer Terminal Signal Description 1 10 ko OPTA1 po Reference output Voltage for potentiometer etc 2 Al1 Analog input voltage range Voltage input frequency reference J wire 0 10V DC transmitter I O Ground Ground for reference and controls Gal gale 4 Al2 Analog input current range Current input frequency reference 0 20 mA e awe Gonroivolageowpu Viltageforsutches ec max A 7 eGND O ground Ground for reference and controls Start Stop Contact closed fault Control place A PID controller Contact open no fault External fault input Contact closed fault programmable Contact open no fault Fault reset Contact closed fault reset programmable Common for DIN1 DIN3 Connect to GND or 24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches see 6 I O ground Ground for reference and controls Start Stop Control place B Contact closed Start Direct frequency reference 15 DIN5 Jogging speed selection Contact closed Jogging speed programmable active 16 DIN6 Control place A B selection Contact open Control place A is active Contact closed Control place B is active 17 CMB Common for DIN4 DIN6 Connect to GND or 24V 18 AOT Output frequency Programmable ARAO Outen Range 0 20 mA R max 5002 20 DO1 Digita
76. 5 Table 7 4 Input Signals Basic Settings G1 2 1 Continued Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust D Note P1 2 1 13 Motor 2 1 367 0 No reset potentiometer 1 Reset if stopped or powered frequency reference down memory reset 2 Reset if powered down P1 2 1 14 Motor 2 370 0 No reset potentiometer PID 1 Reset if stopped or powered reference memory down reset 2 Reset if powered down P1 2 1 15 B reference scale P1 2 1 16 Hz 344 0 0 Scaling off minimum gt 0 0 Scaled min value P1 2 1 16 B reference scale P1 2 1 15 320 0 Hz 345 0 0 Scaling off maximum gt 0 0 Scaled max value Analog Input 1 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 2 Table 7 5 Input Signals Analog Input 1 G1 2 2 Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust ID Note PIZZiz ATsinaseecion AMNAT ANNEAU AWNAT 8T Hey fs o1 9M Nofitering P1 2 2 3 Al1 signal range 2 320 0 Signal range 0 100 1 Signal range 20 100 2 Custom range P1 2 2 4 Al1 custom 160 00 160 00 A 321 minimum setting P1 2 2 5 Al1 custom 160 00 160 00 100 00 322 maximum setting P1 2 2 6 AI1 signal inversion 320 00 Hz 323 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 Analog Input 2 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 3 Table 7 6 Input Signals Analog Input 2 G1 2 3 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Defau
77. 6 Output frequency limit 234567 P1 3 10 P1 3 4 1 P1 3 2 1 supervision function 0 No supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision 3 Brake on control Application 6 only see Page A 1 If the output frequency goes under over the set limit ID316 this function generates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via the relay outputs RO1 or RO2 depending on the settings of ID312 to ID314 316 Output frequency limit 234567 P1 3 11 P1 3 4 2 P1 3 2 2 supervision value Selects the frequency value supervised by ID315 See Figure 8 16 Example ano Figure 8 16 Output Frequency Supervision 8 20 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 319 DIN 2 function 5 P1 2 1 This parameter has 14 selections If digital input DIN2 is not used set this value to 0 0 Not used 1 External fault Contact closed Fault is displayed and the motor stopped when the input is active 2 External fault Contact open Fault is displayed and the motor stopped when the input Is not active 3 Run enable Contact open Start of motor disabled Contact closed Start of motor enabled 4 Acceleration or deceleration time selection Contact open Acceleration Deceleration time 1 selected Contact closed Acceleration Deceleration time 2 selected Closing contact Force control place to I O terminal Closing contact Force control place
78. 6 20 2 Autochange 4 DigIN 01 Digln E 10 Interlock P1 2 6 21 9 Autochange 5 DigIN 01 Digln E 10 Interlock P1 2 6 22 PID reference 2 DigIN 01 Digln E 10 cc closing contact oc opening contact DigIN 0 1 EN 428 Activated if cc 9 DigIN 0 1 m 429 Activated if cc 9 430 Activated if cc 9 DigIN 0 1 DigIN 0 1 431 Selected with P1 1 15 oc 1 Selected with P1 2 1 1 cc 7 16 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Output Signals Digital Output Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 3 1 Table 7 10 Output Signals Digital Outputs G1 3 1 Code Parameter Win Max Unit Default Cust 1D Piatt Reay Oig0UTOr oigouTE 10 owouTot e pranzo an bOUTOi DuOUTE 0 DuoUTti fes PI3137 Fa DigOUTGi DuOUTE 0 DuOUTAT sa nuu MEME I PI33 80 3 1 5 9 P1 3 1 5 Warning DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT 0 1 DigOUTE 10 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT 0 1 436 P1 3 1 69 External fault DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 warning P1 3 1 7 Reference fault DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 438 warning P1 3 1 8 9 Overtemperatur DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 439 e warning PL3199 3 1 9 2 Reverse Reverse DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT 0 1 DM Direction DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 Le d
79. 604 to value ID606 100 ID111 Note In high torque low speed applications it is likely that the motor will overheat If the motor has to run a prolonged time under these conditions special attention must be paid to cooling the motor Use external cooling for the motor if the temperature tends to rise too high For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 3 SPX9000 AF Drives 110 111 112 113 118 119 120 124 126 127 128 129 130 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Nominal voltage of the motor P1 6 P1 1 6 Find this value Vn on the rating plate of the motor This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point ID603 to 100 VaMmotor Nominal frequency of the P1 7 P1 1 7 motor Find this value fn on the rating plate of the motor This parameter sets the field weakening point ID602 to the same value Nominal speed of the motor P1 8 P1 1 8 Find this value nn on the rating plate of the motor Nominal current of the motor P1 9 P1 1 9 Find this value I on the rating plate of the motor PID controller gain 57 P1 1 12 This parameter defines the gain of the PID controller If the value of the parameter is set to 100 a change of 10 in the error value causes the controller output to change by 10 If the parameter value is set to 0 the PID controller operates as ID controller See the examples on Page 8 5 PID controller I time 57 P1 1 13 ID119 defines
80. 8 Control from I O terminals External control mode Menu M2 ID125 Applications 3456 19 Frequency converter temperature Frequency converter heatsink temperature goes beyond the limit supervision Applications 3456 set supervision limits ID354 and ID355 20 Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction is different from the requested one Applications 345 20 Reference inverted Application 6 21 External brake control inverted External brake ON OFF control ID352 and ID353 Output Applications 3456 active when brake control is OFF MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 19 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 8 8 Output Signals Via DO1 and Output Relays RO1 and RO2 Continued Setting value Signal content Signal content 22 Thermistor fault or warning The thermistor input of option board indicates Applications 3456 overtemperature Fault or warning depending on ID732 23 Fieldbus input data Fieldbus input data FBFixedControlWord to DO RO Application 5 On Off control Application 6 Selects the analog input to be monitored ID356 ID357 ID358 and ID463 24 Fieldbus input data 1 Fieldbus data FBFixedControlWord to DO RO Application 6 25 Fieldbus input data 2 Fieldbus data FBFixedControlWord to DO RO Application 6 26 Fieldbus input data 3 Fieldbus data FBFixedControlWord to DO RO Application
81. 8 56 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 75 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 1017 Sleep delay 57 P1 1 16 The minimum amount of time the frequency has to remain below the Sleep level before the fequency converter is stopped See Figure 8 56 1018 Wake up level 57 P1 1 17 The wake up level defines the level below which the actual value must fall or which has to be exceeded before the Run state of the frequency converter is restored See Figure 8 56 Actual Value Wake Up Level ID1018 Output Frequency t ID1017 tx ID1017 Runni Start Stop Status of unning the Var Speed Drive ooo sm Stop Figure 8 56 Frequency Converter Sleep Function 1019 Wake up function 57 P1 1 18 This parameter defines whether the restoration of the Run state occurs when the actual value signal falls below or exceeds the Wake up level ID1018 See Figure 8 56 and Table 8 14 Application 5 has selections 0 1 and Application 7 selections 0 3 available 8 76 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 8 14 Selectable Wake Up Functions Parameter Value Limit Description Wake up happens when actual value goes below the limit Wake up happens when actual value exceeds the limit Wake up happens when actual value goes below the limit Wake up happens when actual value exc
82. 89 Digital output 2 signal selection 6 P1 3 2 1 See ID486 490 Digital output 2 function 6 P1 3 2 2 See ID312 491 Digital output 2 on delay 6 iP 1 3 2 3 See ID487 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 49 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 492 Digital output 2 off delay 6 P1 3 1 4 See ID488 493 Adjust input 6 P1 2 1 4 With this parameter you can select the signal according to which the frequency reference to the motor is fine adjusted 0 Not used 1 Analog input 1 2 Analog input 2 3 Analog input 3 4 Analog input 4 5 Signal from fieldbus FBProcessDatalN 494 Adjust minimum 6 P1 2 1 5 495 Adjust maximum 6 P1 2 1 6 These parameters define the minimum and maximum of adjusted signals See Figure 8 41 Adjust f Hz Maximum Adjusted ID495 1096 Adjust 096 hm Minimum ID494 10 Analog Input Figure 8 41 An Example of Adjust Input 4962 Parameter Set 1 Set 2 selection 6 P1 2 7 21 8 50 With this parameter you can select between Parameter Set 1 and Set 2 The input for this function can be selected from any slot The procedure of selecting between the sets is explained in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 Digital input FALSE The active set is saved to set 2 e Set 1 is loaded as the active set Digital input TRUE The active set is saved to set 1 Set 2 is loaded as the active set Note The parameter values can be changed in
83. Applications 3 4 5 or 2 to which output the supervision signals ID447 and ID448 are connected Applications 6 and 7 347 Output frequency limit 2 34567 P1 3 13 P1 3 4 4 P1 3 2 4 supervision value Selects the frequency value supervised by ID346 See Figure 8 16 8 28 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 348 Torque limit supervision 34567 P13 14 P 1 3 4 5 P1 3 2 5 function 0 No supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision 3 Brake off control Application 6 only see Page A 1 If the calculated torque value falls below or exceeds the set limit ID349 this function generates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 or RO2 depending on 1 the settings of ID312 to ID314 Applications 3 4 5 or 2 to which output the supervision signal ID451 is connected Applications 6 and 7 349 Torque limit supervision value 34567 P1 3 15 P1 3 4 6 P1 3 2 6 Set here the torque value to be supervised by ID348 Applications 3 and 4 The torque supervision value can be reduced below the setpoint with the external free analog input signal see ID361 and ID362 350 Reference limit supervision 34567 PT 3 16 P 1 3 4 7 P 1 3 2 7 function 0 No supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision If the reference value falls below or exceeds the set limit ID351 this functi
84. C Braking command 12 Motor potentiometer DOWN 37 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 0 0 10096 1 20 100 2 Custom setting range 9 21 Analog input 1 scale minimum 322 Analog input 1 scale maximum 323 Analog input 1 reference Inversion yes no 324 Analog input 1 reference filter time constant 388 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 0 0 20 mA 1 4 20 mA P1 2 2 DIN3 function P1 2 3 Al2 signal selection Al1 signal range 8 P1 2 4 2 OO N 100 00 P1 2 5 Al1 custom setting minimum P1 2 6 Al1 custom setting maximum P1 2 7 Al1 signal inversion P1 2 8 Al1 signal filter time P1 2 9 Al2 signal selection P1 2 10 AI2 signal range P1 2 11 Al2 custom setting minimum P1 2 12 Al2 custom setting maximum 100 00 100 0 1 gt 10 00 eo O 2 OO N O1 2 custom setting range 26 Analog input 2 scale minimum Analog input 2 scale maximum 100 00 8 100 00 100 00 OO NO N N Rising edge required to start CP control place Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 3 5 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 3 4 Input Signals G1 2 Continued ih Une S Na a P1 2 13 AI2 signal inversion 328 Analog input 2 reference
85. Code Parameter Mim Mex Unit Default Cust D Note P1 3 19 Analog output 1 A 1 TTF programming method used See signal selection Page 6 3 P1 3 2 Analog output 307 0 Not used function 1 Output freq 0 fmax 2 Freq reference 0 fmax 3 Motor speed 0 Motor nominal speed 4 Motor current 0 lhMotor 5 Motor torque 0 ThMotor 6 Motor power 0 Puto 7 Motor voltage 0 Unmotor 8 DC Bus volt 0 1000V 9 PID controller ref value 10 PID contr act value 1 11 PID contr act value 2 12 PID contr error value 13 PID controller output 14 PT100 temperature P133 Analog output filter 10 00 1 00 dl 0 No filtering time P1 3 4 Analog output ul 0 Not inverted inversion 1 Inverted P1 3 5 Analog output 310 0 O0mA minimum 1 4mA xpo 1 312 0 Not used 4 Fault inverted 5 FC overheat warning 6 Ext fault or warning 7 Ref fault or warning 8 Warning 9 Reversed 10 Preset speed 1 11 At speed 12 Mot regulator active 13 OP freq limit superv 1 14 OP freq limit superv 2 15 Torque limit superv 16 Ref limit supervision 17 External brake control 18 Remote Control Active 19 FC temp limit superv 20 Unrequested direction 21 Ext brake control inv 22 Thermistor fault warn 23 Fieldbus input data P1 3 7 E output 1 function un 313 Same as parameter 1 3 7 P1 3 8 Relay output 1 function P1 3 9 Relay output 2
86. Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives Application Manual August 2005 New Information MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Important Notice Please Read MN04004001E The product discussed in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in Eaton Electrical Inc selling policies The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the relevant Eaton Electrical Inc selling policy NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMATION RECOMMENDATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN In no event will Eaton Electrical Inc be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract in tort including negligence strict liability or otherwise for any special indirect incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment plant or power system cost of capital loss of power additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information recommendations and descriptions contained herein The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Cover Photo Cutler Hammer SP
87. EM 3 GAS 8 53010 NIIEIINENN P1 6 9 Switching Varies Varies 601 See Table 8 12 on Page 8 57 frequency for exact values P1 6 10 Overvoltage 607 0 Not used controller 1 Used no ramping 2 Used ramping P1 6 11 Undervoltage 0 Not used controller Used P1 6 12 Motor control 521 See par 1 6 1 mode 2 P1 6 13 Speed controller 32767 3000 637 P gain open loop P1 6 14 Speed controller 32767 300 638 gain open loop P1 6 15 Load Drooping 100 00 0 01 620 Drooping of nominal speed at nominal torque P1 6 16 Identification 1 631 0 Not used 1 Used Closed Loop parameter group 1 6 17 SPX only P1 6 17 1 Magnetizing 100 00 A 612 current P1 6 17 2 Speed control P 1000 30 613 gain P1 6 17 3 Speed control I 500 0 614 time P1 6 17 4 Load drooping 0 00 10000 10000 00 000 1620 P1 6 17 5 Acceleration 300 00 626 compensation P1 6 17 6 Slip adjust 619 P1 6 17 7 Magnetizing NN C M LE current at start Min Max P1 6 17 8 Magnetizing time 600 0 628 at start P1 6 17 9 0 speed time at 32000 ms 100 615 start P1 6 17 10 0 speed time at 32000 stop 0 Not used 1 Torque memory 2 Torque reference 3 Start up torque fwd rev P1 6 17 12 Start up torque 300 0 300 0 FWD P1 6 17 13 Start up torque 300 0 300 0 REV P1 6 17 15 Encoder filter time 1000 P1 6 17 17 Current control 100 00 P gain 6 22 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04
88. F Drives August 2005 Menus M3 to M6 Menus M3 to M6 provide information on the Active Faults Fault History System Menu settings and the Expander Board setup These menu items are explained in detail in Chapter 5 of the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Monitoring Menu M7 The monitored items are the actual values of parameters and signals as well as the status and measurements of other elements Monitored items cannot be edited See the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 Menu information item M7 for more information MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 27 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 7 28 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 ee a Chapter 8 Description of Parameters Introduction On the following pages you will find the parameter descriptions arranged according to the individual ID number of the parameter A parameter ID number with a footnote e g 418 Motor potentiometer UP indicates that the TTF programming method shall be applied to this parameter see Page 6 3 Some parameter names are followed by a number code indicating the All in One applications in which the parameter is included If no code is shown the parameter is available in all applications See the list of applications below The parameter numbers under which the parameter appears in different appl
89. Figure 8 64 Actual Value Special Display llle 8 83 Figure A 1 Brake Control with Additional Limits 0 0000 c eee eee eee A 1 Figure A 2 Brake Control Logic 0 0 ccc ee eee A 2 List of Tables MN04004001E Table 1 1 Basic Application Default I O Configuration llle Table 1 2 Monitoring Values icu d s rs d woke yo C EE 0 die POE AREE eee de ee e Table 1 3 Basic Parameters G1 cere hn Table 1 4 Keypad Control Parameters M2 lle RR Table 2 1 Standard Application Default I O Configuration llle Table 2 2 Monitoring Values cece hh Table 2 3 Basic Parameters GT1 1 i s oia o9 xx x xxx x me Ry x S3 EROR XC ux Table 2 4 Input Signals G1 2 leeren Table 2 5 Output Signals GT1 3 4 xac uat te EO RUE ERROR OCC EC we qs Table 2 6 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 leeren Table 2 7 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 llle Table 2 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 l l nnn MJ NO NO NO NO MO MO NO MO 3 3 33 Q CO O0 O1 O1 43 WN O1 4 WN Table 2 9 Protections G1 7 ee s Table 2 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 eee 2 1 Table 2 11 Keypad Control Parameters M2 leen 2 1 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com V SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer Augus
90. Inching function two different references Possibility to connect the FB Process data to any parameter and some monitoring values Identification parameter can be adjusted manually The parameters of the Multi Purpose Control Application are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual The explanations are arranged according to the individual ID number of the parameter MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Control I O Table 6 1 Multi Purpose Control Application Default I O Configuration and Connection Example Terminai Sina Desrplon Reference potentiometer OPTA1 1 10 ko Reference output Voltage for potentiometer etc 2 Al1 Analog input voltage range Voltage input frequency reference 0 10V DC An iG Ground Analog input current range Current input frequency reference 0720 mA re Start forward Contact closed start forward programmable Start reverse Contact closed start reverse programmable Fault reset Contact closed fault reset programmable Common for DIN1 DIN3 Connect to GND or 24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches see terminal 6 I O ground Ground for reference and controls Jog speed selection Contact closed jog speed active programmable External fault Contact open no fault programmable Contact closed fault Accel decel time select Contact open P1 1 3 P1 1 4 in use
91. Input 2 Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 2 3 Table 6 6 Analog Input 2 Parameters G1 2 3 Ek e m s er M P1 2 3 1 AI2 signal 388 selection AI2 signal range ENEI 1 20 100 9 2 10V 10V 3 Custom range 9 P1 2 3 4 AI2 custom 100 00 100 00 minimum setting P1 2 3 5 AI2 custom 100 00 100 00 maximum setting Al2 reference scaling minimum value Selects the frequency that corresponds to the min reference signal Al2 reference Selects the frequency that scaling maximum corresponds to the max value reference signal P1 2 3 8 AI2 joystick hysteresis P1 2 3 9 AI2 sleep limit P1 2 3 10 Al2 sleep delay P1 2 3 11 Al2 joystick offset 50 00 50 00 Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 11 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Analog Input 3 Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 2 4 Table 6 7 Analog Input 3 Parameters G1 2 4 i Nw o URN P1 2 4 1 AI3 signal 141 selection P1 2 4 3 Al3 signal range EHI e 1 20 10096 2 10V 10V 3 Custom range imul 2 4 4 AI3 custom ind 00 me 00 imd setting P1 2 4 5 AI3 custom ui E I I maximum setting P1 2 4 6 AIS3 signal 1 151 0 Not inverted inversion 1 Inverted Analog Input 4 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 5 Table 6 8 Analog Input 4 Parameters G1 2 5 moe m e
92. Lim Superv Figure 6 3 Screenshot of 9000X Drive Programming Tool Entering the Address Code A CAUTION Be ABSOLUTELY sure not to connect two functions to one and same output in order to avoid function overruns and to ensure flawless operation Notice The inputs unlike the outputs cannot be changed in RUN state Defining Unused Inputs Outputs All unused inputs and outputs must be given the board slot value 0 and the value 1 also for the terminal number The value 0 0 is also the default value for most of the functions However if you want to use the values of a digital input signal for e g testing purposes only you can set the board slot value to 0 and the terminal number to any number between 2 10 to place the input to a TRUE state In other words the value 1 corresponds to open contact and values 2 to 10 to closed contact In case of analog inputs giving the value 1 for the terminal number corresponds to 0 value 2 corresponds to 20 and any value between 3 and 10 corresponds to 100 6 4 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Master Follower Function SPX Only The Master Follower function is designed for applications in which the system is run by several SPX drives and the motor shafts are coupled to each other via gearing chain belt etc The SPX drives are in closed loop control mode The external control signals are c
93. Max P1 6 14 8 Magnetizing 600 0 time at start P1 6 14 9 0 speed time at 32000 start P1 6 14 10 0 speed time at 32000 m stop P1 6 14 11 Start up torque EN O N N O N CO O O1 m O O N O 0 Not used 1 Torque memory 2 Torque reference 3 Start up torque fwd rev P1 6 14 13 Start up torque 300 0 300 0 REV P1 6 14 12 Start up torque 300 0 300 0 FWD P1 6 14 15 Encoder filter 1000 time I di ad O O O O O O 0 00 O CO P1 6 14 17 Current control 100 00 P gain MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 3 11 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 3 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Continued Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust ID Noe Advanced Open Loop parameter group 1 6 15 SPX only P1 6 15 1 Zero speed 250 0 120 0 625 current P1 6 15 2 Minimum 100 0 80 0 622 current P1883 Fluxreference 00 ooo X 800 Premsa Frequency imi o0 ooo Ce mo fe Press Wers o h p e Protections Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 7 Table 3 9 Protections G1 7 Code Parameter Mi Mex Unit Default cut D Note P1 7 1 Response to 0 No response 4mA reference 1 Warning fault 2 Warning Previous Freq 3 Wrng PresetFreq 1 7 2 4 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 5 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 2 4mA reference Par 1 1 2 Hz 728 fault frequency P1 7 3
94. P 1 7 3 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signal in the programmable digital inputs DIN3 The information can also be programmed into digital output DO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2 Output phase supervision 234567 P1 7 6 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting Output phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approximately equal currents Earth fault protection 234567 P1 7 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting Earth fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero The overcurrent protection is always working and protects the frequency converter from earth faults with high currents For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 704 705 706 Motor thermal protection 234567 P1 7 8 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting If tripping is selected the drive will stop and activate the fault stage Deactivating this protection i e setting parameter
95. SpeedcontrolPgain 0 1000 30 eis MUI E CE a 0000 000 620 dd ee MN EN RE compensation P1 6 14 6 Slip adjust adjust ELE P1 6 14 7 Seadust na current at m Peco te start Min Max P1 6 14 8 Magnetizing time at 600 0 start PIETAS 0 speedtime atst 0 82000 ms 100 P1 6 14 10 0 UT timeatstop 0 X 132000 EUN IDE P1 6 14 11 Start up torque ee 0 Not used 1 Torque memory 2 Torque reference 3 Start up torque fwd rev Preman SurupioqusFWD 3009 300 s 00 883 P1681413 StwtuptorqueREV 3000 300 fs o0 84 PIETAS Encoderfitertime fo 100 msj 88 PISA CurenconroPgsi 0 00 1000 W 4000 87 Advanced Open Loop parameter group 1 6 15 SPX only P1 6 15 1 Zerospeedcumen 0 0 2500 1200 fa PLG182 Minimum current 00 1000 800 fez o P1 6 153 Fluxreference 00 1000 800 fa y PLGi amp 4 Frequenylimt 00 1000 200 fes o P16 155 WHzbosw o h p a MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 4 11 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Protections Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 7 Table 4 9 Protections G1 7 Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust ID Note P1 7 1 Response to 4mA 5 700 0 No response reference fault 1 Warning 2 Warni
96. System Principal Control Diagram 7 4 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Short Description of Function and Essential Parameters Automatic Changing Between Drives Autochange P1 9 24 The Autochange function allows the starting and stopping order of drives controlled by the pump and fan automatics to be changed at desired intervals The drive controlled by frequency converter can also be included in the automatic changing and locking sequence par 1 9 25 The Autochange function makes it possible to equalize the run times of the motors and to prevent e g pump stalls due to too long running breaks e Apply the Autochange function with parameter 1 9 24 Autochange e The autochange takes place when the time set with parameter 1 9 26 Autochange interval has expired and the capacity used is below the level defined with parameter 1 9 28 Autochange frequency limit e The running drives are stopped and re started according to the new order e External contactors controlled through the relay outputs of the frequency converter connect the drives to the frequency converter or to the mains If the motor controlled by the frequency converter is included in the autochange sequence it is always controlled through the relay output activated first The other relays activated later control the auxiliary drives see Figure 7 4 and Figure 7 5 Parameter 1 9 24
97. X9000 AF Drives For more information visit www EatonElectrical com i SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 eis Table of Contents LIS OF FIGURES aur d oe ep eae ee ne wore a E eee eee OR RUR E ee ee ee ee IV LIST OF TABLES s oc Giro ued oe ett des op dhs pee ORE eee eae eis Hee ELSE Tes V CHAPITER O SAFETY i242 m 636 556 380 One RUP red eo EE 3 3 RR EUR eee viii Definitions and Symbols 2 000 cece eee eee eee viii Hazardous Hidh VOLIBIGO 4622605525 E inei r estes Seu eee eee ead Vill Cautions and NoticeS 0 00 ccc ee eee eee eee Ix CHAPTER 1 BASIC APPLICATION SVCHSTO01 leen 1 1 Jagssio s PC 1 1 Genie P m 1 2 Basic Application Parameter Lists 0 0000 cee eee mnn 1 3 CHAPTER 2 STANDARD APPLICATION SVCHSTO2 2 1 HO CUON So x6 850r 9 13 1 RUE POP eee PISOS oe eee io ard oe ayes V EORR ERR 2 1 Seide PPP 2 2 Standard Application Parameter Lists lle 2 3 CHAPTER 3 LOCAL REMOTE CONTROL APPLICATION SVCHST03 3 1 inue ein a asni oben aerate bee cae assem Ge me eee He oh ae ape sete eee a 3 1 Cog i ow 3 2 Local Remote Control Application Parameter Lists les 3 3 CHAPTER 4 MULTI STEP SPEED CONTROL APPLICATION SVCHST04
98. act start disabled and drive stopped if running see Figure 8 8 3 3 wire connection pulse control DIN1 closed contact start pulse DIN2 open contact stop pulse DIN3 can be programmed for reverse command see Figure 8 8 Output If Start and Stop pulses are Frequency Stop Function simultaneous the Stop pulse ID506 Coasting overrides the Start pulse Figure 8 8 Start Pulse Stop Pulse 8 12 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N August 2005 MN04004001E Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives The selections including the text Rising edge required to start shall be used to exclude the possibility of an unintentional start when for example power is connected re connected after a power failure after a fault reset after the drive is stopped by Run Enable Run Enable False or when the control place is changed The Start Stop contact must be opened before the motor can be started Applications 2 and 4 4 DIN1 closed contact start forward Rising edge required to start DIN2 closed contact start reverse Rising edge required to start 5 DIN1 closed contact start Rising edge required to start open contact stop DIN2 closed contact reverse open contact forward 6 DIN1 closed contact start Rising edge required to start open contact stop DIN2 closed contact start enabled open contact start disabled and drive stopped if running Application
99. activating the protection by setting the parameter to 0 will reset the underload time counter to zero See Page A 5 Underload protection field 234567 P1 7 18 weakening area load The torque limit can be set between 10 0 150 0 96 x Tnwotor This parameter gives the value for the minimum torque allowed when the output frequency is above the field weakening point See Figure 8 51 If you change ID113 nominal motor current this parameter is automatically restored to the default value See Page A 5 Underload Area Field Weakening Point ID602 Figure 8 51 Setting of Minimum Load Underload protection zero 234567 P1 7 19 frequency load The torque limit can be set between 5 0 150 0 96 x Tnwotor This parameter gives value for the minimum torque allowed with zero frequency See Figure 8 51 If you change the value of ID113 nominal motor current this parameter is automatically restored to the default value See Page A 5 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 716 Underload time 234567 P1 7 20 This time can be set between 2 0 and 600 0s This is the maximum time allowed for an underload state to exist An internal up down counter counts the accumulated underload time If the underload counter value goes above this limit the protection will cause a trip according to ID713 If the drive is stopped the underload counter is reset t
100. age 6 3 Monitoring Values Control Keypad Menu M7 MN04004001E The monitoring values are the actual values of parameters and signals as well as statuses and measurements Monitoring values cannot be edited See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 for more information a TT OO Table 4 2 Monitoring Values Code Parameter JUnit Output frequency FF N N Frequency reference Motor speed o 3 Motor current i as Motor torque o Motor power Motor voltage DC Bus voltage Unit temperature Motor temperature Analog input 1 Analog input 2 DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 DIN4 DIN5 DIN6 DO1 RO1 RO2 Analog lout N Nl al al al ala O1 WW NM NM gt O Oo o01 C5 3 PPE l Mill M1 17 Wer owewtemeny Wiz Frequency reference vrs Motorspeed vie Motorcurrent Wis Motortoraue vie Motorpower a7 Meere vis DcBusvotage vis Unittemperewre Was Motor temperatus van Anatoginputt vin Analog input2 vins oma omz ons vira oma oms ons vi porron vie JAweska M117 Mutimonitoring tems Multimonitoring items For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 4 3 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Basic Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 1 Table 4 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Code Parameter Min Max Uni Defaut Cust ID Note PITT Minfrequency 000 Parii2 Rz 000 wip P1 1 2 Max frequency Par 1 1 1 320 00 Hz 60 0
101. al control 173 reference 4 Keypad reference 5 Fieldbus reference FBSpeedReference 6 Motor potentiometer 7 PID controller P1 1 14 Remotes control reference 4 Keypad reference 5 Fieldbus reference FBSpeedReference 6 Motor potentiometer 7 PID controller P1 1 15 PID controller 0 Anal volt input 2 3 reference signal 1 Anal curr input 4 5 Place A 2 PID ref from Keypad control page par 3 4 3 PID ref from fieldbus ProcessDatalN 1 4 Motor potentiometer PEA PID controler gain 00 0000 a Moo pe P1 1 18 PID controller D 100 00 132 time Pras Sleep frequency Par tit Pentt2 He 1000 poe i120 Sleepdeley fo 390 f o P1121 Wake uptevel 090 10000 200 po P1 1 22 Wake up function 1 1019 0 Wake up at fall below wake up level 1 1 17 1 Wake up at exceeded wake up level 1 1 17 P1 1 23 Jogging speed Par 1 1 1 Hz 10 00 124 reference FILS PID controler time 000 3500 s f0 H8 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 5 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Input Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 Table 5 4 Input Signals G1 2 Code Parameter Min Mex Unit Default Cust D Ne P1 2 10 DIN2 function 1 319 0 Not used 1 External fault cc 9 2 External fault oc 9 3 Run enable 4 Acc Dec time selection 5 Force Loca
102. as taken place or on removal of Start request at control place A MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 5 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Parameters 1 9 27 Maximum Number of Auxiliary Drives and 1 9 28 Autochange Frequency Limit These parameters define the level below which the capacity used must remain so that the autochange can take place This level is defined as follows e Ifthe number of running auxiliary drives is smaller than the value of parameter 1 9 27 the autochange function can take place e Ifthe number of running auxiliary drives is equal to the value of parameter 1 9 27 and the frequency of the controlled drive is below the value of parameter 1 9 28 the autochange can take place e Ifthe value of parameter 1 9 28 is 0 0 Hz the autochange can take place only in rest position Stop and Sleep regardless of the value of parameter 1 9 27 Interlock Selection P1 9 23 This parameter is used to activate the interlock inputs The interlocking signals come from the motor switches The signals functions are connected to digital inputs which are programmed as interlock inputs using the corresponding parameters The pump and fan control automatics only control the motors with active interlock data e The interlock data can be used even when the Autochange function is not activated e l fthe interlock of an auxiliary drive is inactivated and another unused auxiliary
103. at amount corresponding to the nominal torque of the motor See Page A 3 CL Startup torque 234567 P1 6 12 11 P1 6 15 11 Chooses the startup torque Torque Memory is used in crane applications Startup torque FWD REV can be used in other applications to help the speed controller See Page A 3 0 Not Used 1 TorqMemory 2 torque Ref 3 Torq Fwd Rev AOL Minimum current 234567 P1 6 13 2 P1 6 16 2 Minimum current to the motor in the current control frequency region Larger value gives more torque but increases losses See Page A 3 AOL Flux reference 234567 P1 6 13 3 P1 6 16 3 Reference for flux below the frequency limit Larger value gives more torque but increases losses See Page A 3 AOL Zero speed current 234567 P1 6 13 1 P1 6 16 1 At very low frequencies this parameter defines the constant current reference to the motor See Page A 3 CL Acceleration compensation 234567 P1 6 12 5 P1 6 15 5 Sets the inertia compensation to improve speed response during acceleration and deceleration The time is defined as acceleration time to nominal speed with nominal torque This parameter is also active in advanced open loop mode CL Magnetizing current at start 234567 P1 6 12 7 P1 6 15 7 CL Magnetizing time at start 234567 P1 6 12 8 P1 6 15 8 Sets the rise time of magnetizing current Identification P1 6 13 P1 6 16 AOL V Hz boost 234567 P1 6 13 5 P1 6 16 5 Boost voltage at Frequen
104. ation is used to control the operation of pumps and fans It can be used for example to decrease the delivery pressure in booster stations if the measured input pressure falls below a limit specified by the user The application utilizes external contactors for switching between the motors connected to the frequency converter The autochange feature provides the capability of changing the starting order of the auxiliary drives Autochange between 2 drives main drive 1 auxiliary drive is set as default See Page 7 5 e All inputs and outputs are freely programmable Additional functions e Analog input signal range selection e Two frequency limit supervisions e Torque limit supervision e Reference limit supervision e Second ramps and S shape ramp programming e Programmable Start Stop and Reverse logic e DC brake at start and stop e Three prohibit frequency areas e Programmable U f curve and switching frequency e Autorestart e Motor thermal and stall protection fully programmable off warning fault e Motor underload protection e Input and output phase supervision e Sleep function The parameters of the Basic Application are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual The explanations are arranged according to the individual ID number of the parameter MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Control I O Table 7 1 Pump and Fan Control Appli
105. atonElectrical com 2 3 SPX9000 AF Drives Table 2 2 Monitoring Values Continued Code Parameter Unit b AO1 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Description M1 17 Monitoring items T Displays three selectable monitoring values Basic Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 1 Table 2 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Code Parameter Min _ Max_ Unit Default Cust ID Note PIT Minfrequency 000 Par 112z 000 P1 1 2 Max frequency Par 320 00 Hz 60 00 1 1 1 s 30 PIT3 Acceleration time 1 0 Pi 1 4 _ Decelerationtime 0 1 30000 s 30 104 P115 Cumentimit O4xlu 2 xi o w P1 1 6 Nominal voltage of the motor Nominal frequency of 30 00 111 the motor Nominal speed of the 300 112 motor Nominal current of the 0 4 xl 2 x lH motor P1 1 11 Local Control Place Remote Control Place 102 gt P1 1 7 320 00 Hz 60 00 P1 1 8 20 000 rpm 1720 p gt P1 1 9 113 P 120 171 P1 1 12 P 1 1 13 Local reference d 1 00 3 3 3 3 P1 1 14 Remote reference M 9 co O1 H H Par 1 1 2 Par 1 1 2 P1 1 15 P1 1 16 Z Z Preset speed 1 Preset speed 2 DIN O00 2 4 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com NOTE If fmax gt than the motor synchronous speed check suitability for motor and drive system Check the rating plate of the motor The default applies for a 4 p
106. cation Default I O Configuration and Connection Example with 2 wire transmitter Terminal Signal Description O Reference potentiometer 1 10kQ OPTA1 E RNC Reference output Voltage for potentiometer etc Al1 Analog input voltage range Voltage input frequency reference 0 10V DC 2 wire transmitter 3 AM I O Ground Ground for reference and controls Actual value 4 Al2 Analog input current range Current input frequency reference lalla 0 4 20 mA u p ec 6 24V e Control voltage output Voltage for switches etc max 0 1A 7 GND I O ground Ground for reference and controls DIN1 Start Stop Control place A Contact closed start PID controller programm DIN2 Interlock 1 Contact closed Interlock used programmable Contact open Interlock not used 10 DIN3 Interlock 2 Contact closed Interlock used programmable Contact open Interlock not used 11 CMA Common for DIN1 DIN3 Connect to GND or 24V CSS SS SS l 12 24V e Control voltage output Voltage for switches see 6 13 GND I O ground Ground for reference and controls 14 DIN4 Start Stop Control place B Contact closed Start Direct frequency reference programmable 15 DIN5 Jogging speed selection Contact closed Jogging speed active programmable 16 DIN6 Control place A B selection Contact open Control place A is active progra
107. cc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting 733 See P1 7 21 734 See P1 7 21 P1 7 22 Response to fieldbus 2 fault P1 7 23 Response to slot fault I 12 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Autorestart Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 8 Table 4 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 I Iu NM CN CHNUNMANENU MR PIS Wat me fom poo s 080 UV PL82 Trialtime LL ML M 6000 s 3000 7i8 ur M 8 3 getme s function ae 0 Ramp 1 Flying start 2 According to par 1 4 6 indi 8 4 Number of tries after m Wwevogewip o M P1 8 5 Number of tries after D A m P1 8 6 Number of tries after 3 722 overcurrent trip P1 8 7 Number of tries after 10 723 CUPS Jmemxemp o po oo P1 8 8 Number of tries after 10 LOS memo o 5 LP T P1 8 9 Number of tries after 10 external fault trip P1 8 10 Number of tries after 10 1 FUA lunderoadtourwin b o S Keypad Control Control Keypad Menu M2 The parameters for the selection of control place and direction on the keypad are listed below See the Keypad control menu in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Table 4 11 Keypad Control Parameters IM2 EMEN ME LM MM LL pia esie p fe fo i 2 Direction on keypad mE 0 Forward 1 Reverse EN ia button 114 0 Limited function of Stop button 1 Stop button always enabled System Men
108. ctions to the digital inputs Each auxiliary drive must be connected to its own interlock input The Pump and fan control only controls those motors whose interlock input is active 0 Interlock feedback not used The frequency converter receives no interlock feedback from the auxiliary drives 1 Update of autochange order in Stop The frequency converter receives interlock feedback from the auxiliary drives In case one of the auxiliary drives is for some reason disconnected from the system and eventually re connected it will be placed last in the autochange line without stopping the system However if the autochange order now becomes for example P1 gt P3 gt P4 gt P2 it will be updated in the next Stop autochange sleep stop etc Example P1 gt P3 gt P4 gt P2 LOCKED gt P1 gt P3 gt P4 5 P2 gt SLEEP gt P1 gt P2 gt P3 gt P4 2 Update of order immediately The frequency converter receives interlock feedback from the auxiliary drives At re connection of an auxiliary drive to the autochange line the automatics will stop all motors immediately and re start with a new setup Example P1 gt P2 gt P4 gt P3 LOCKED gt STOP gt P1 gt P2 gt P3 gt P4 1033 Actual value special display 7 P1 9 29 minimum 1034 Actual value special display 7 P1 9 30 maximum 1035 Actual value special display 7 P1 9 31 decimals These parameters set the minimum and maximum values and the number of
109. cy Limit to increase flux and torque See Page A 3 CL Start up torque forward 234567 P1 6 13 5 P1 6 16 5 Sets the start up torque for forward direction if selected with parameter P1 6 12 11 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 CL Start up torque reverse 234567 P1 6 13 2 P1 6 16 2 Sets the start up torque for reverse direction if selected with parameter P1 6 12 11 AOL Frequency limit 234567 P1 6 13 4 P1 6 16 4 Corner frequency for transition to standard V Hz control The value is given in of motor nominal frequency See Page A 3 Minimum frequency for Open 6 P1 10 8 Loop torque control Defines the frequency limit below which the frequency converter operates in the frequency control mode Because of the nominal slip of the motor the internal torque calculation is inaccurate at low speeds where it is recommended to use the frequency control mode Speed controller P gain Open 6 P1 6 13 Loop Defines the P gain for the speed controlled in Open Loop control mode Speed controller gain Open 6 P1 6 14 Loop Defines the gain for the speed controlled in Open Loop control mode Torque controller P gain 6 P1 10 9 Defines the P gain of the torque controller Torque controller gain 6 P1 10 10 Defines the gain of the torqu
110. d P1 3 5 Analog output 1 minimum P1 3 6 Analog output scale 1000 E Nm P1 3 7 Digital output 1 22 1 312 function 4 Fault inverted 5 FC overheat warning 6 Ext fault or warning 7 Ref fault or warning 8 Warning 9 Reversed 10 Jogging spd selected 11 At speed 12 Mot regulator active 13 OP freq limit superv 1 14 OP freq limit superv 2 15 Torque limit superv 16 Ref limit superv 17 Ext brake control 18 Remote Control Active 19 FC temp limit superv 20 Unrequested rotation direction 21 Ext brake control inverted 22 Thermistor fault warn 3 o mE 3 o NEE P1 3 8 Relay output 1 function Same as parameter 1 3 7 P1 3 9 Relay output 2 function 314 Same as parameter 1 3 7 P1 3 10 Output frequency limit 315 0 No limit 1 supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 4 7 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 4 5 Output Signals G1 3 Continued Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cus ID Note P1 3 11 Output frequency limit 320 00 Hz 316 1 Supervision value P1 3 12 Output frequency limit 346 0 No limit 2 supervision 1 Low limit supervision fessor D D D D D A imi SODSIVISIDR ren 3 13 Output frequency limit 320 00 Hz 347 pee e Supervision value P1 3 14 Torque limit 348 0 No supervision function 1 Low limit o
111. ds to the min reference signal P1 2 16 320 00 Hz 304 Selects the frequency that corresponds to the max reference signal 0 00 No scaling gt 0 scaled max value 36 Reference scaling maximum value P1 2 17 Free analog input signal selection 1 0 Not used 1 U analog volt input 2 lin analog curr input 362 0 No function 1 Reduces current limit par 1 1 5 2 Reduces DC braking current 3 Reduces accel and decel times 4 Reduces torque supervision limit Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 P1 2 18 Free analog input function 4 6 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Output Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 Table 4 5 Output Signals G1 3 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note P1 3 1 AOT signal selection A 1 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 F1 3 2 Analog output function 1 307 0 Not used 1 Output freq 0 f 2 Freq reference 0 fmax 3 Motor speed 0 Motor nominal speed 4 Motor current 0 lhMotor 5 Motor torque 0 Taro 6 Motor power 0 Pamotor 7 Motor voltage 0 Unmotor 8 DC bus volt 0 1000V P1 3 3 Analog output filter 10 00 1 00 308 0 No filtering time P1 3 4 Analog output 1 309 0 Not inverted inversion 1 Inverte
112. e memory reset MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 7 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 5 4 Input Signals G1 2 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note P1 2 26 Motor 2 370 0 No reset potentiometer PID 1 Reset if stopped or powered reference memory down reset 2 Reset if powered down 000 389 a P1 2 29 Error value 1 340 0 No inversion inversion 1 Inversion P1 2 30 PID reference 100 0 5 0 341 rising time me Pe Par E P1 2 31 PID reference falling time P1 2 32 Reference scaling minimum value place B TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 0 Signal range 0 10V 1 Signal range 2 10V 151 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted P1 2 342 AI3 signal selection P1 2 35 Al3 signal range P1 2 37 Al3 filter time P1 2 38 Al4 signal selection P1 2 39 Al4 signal range P1 2 41 AIA filter time 45 41 143 1 1 P1 2 33 Reference scaling Par 1 2 33 320 00 Hz 3 maximum value place B 0 10 0 No filtering 0 1 152 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 1 1 154 0 Signal range 0 10V 1 Signal range 2 10V 1 162 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted Hem s 9 0 iss o Nofiterng 5 8 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Output Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 Table 5 5 Output Signals G1 3
113. e controller Torque reference selection 6 P1 10 4 Defines the source for torque reference 0 Not used 1 Analog input 1 2 Analog input 2 3 Analog input 3 4 Analog input 4 5 Analog input 1 Joystick 6 Analog input 2 Joystick 7 From keypad parameter R3 5 8 Fieldbus Torque reference scaling 6 P1 10 5 maximum value Torque reference scaling 6 P1 10 6 minimum value Scale the custom minimum and maximum levels for analog inputs within 300 0 300 0 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 61 SPX9000 AF Drives 8 62 644 700 701 702 703 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Torque speed limit 6 P1 10 7 With this parameter the maximum frequency for the torque control can be selected 0 Maximum frequency ID102 1 Selected frequency reference 2 Preset speed 7 ID130 Response to the 4 mA reference 234567 P1 7 1 fault 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Warning the frequency from 10 seconds back is set as reference 3 Warning the Preset Frequency ID728 is set as reference 4 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 5 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4 20 mA reference signal is used and the signal falls below 3 5 mA for 5 seconds or below 0 5 mA for 0 5 seconds The information can also be programmed into digital output DO1 or relay outputs RO1 and RO2 Response to external fault 234567
114. e off control torque limit TRUE Te0 2 Motor Torque ID349 Bur Brake Off Brake On Run State On No Run Request Delay f Count Reversing p r No Run Request No brake on control ID315 g Brake on ctrl 2 limits Brake On Control No brake on control Brake on off ctrl 1 limit 4 Output Frequency Figure A 2 Brake Control Logic A 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Closed Loop Parameters ID612 to ID621 Select the Closed loop control mode by setting value 3 or 4 for ID600 Closed loop control mode see Page 8 57 is used when enhanced performance near zero speed and better static speed accuracy with higher speeds are needed Closed loop control mode is based on rotor flux oriented current vector control With this controlling principle the phase currents are divided into a torque producing current portion and a magnetizing current portion Thus the squirrel cage induction machine can be controlled in a fashion of a separately excited DC motor Note These parameters can be used with SVXP drive only Example Motor Control Mode 3 Closed loop speed control This is the usual operation mode when fast response times high accuracy or controlled run at zero frequencies are needed Encoder board should be connected to slot C of the control unit Set the encoder P R parameter P7 3 1 1 Run in open loop and check the enc
115. ectrical com 3 7 function 15 Torque limit superv 16 Ref limit superv 17 Ext brake control 18 Remote control active 19 FC temp limit superv 20 Unrequested rotation direction 21 Ext brake control inverted 22 Thermistor fault warn Same as parameter 1 3 7 314 Same as parameter 1 3 7 315 0 No limit 1 Low limit supervision P1 3 8 output 1 2 High limit supervision SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 3 5 Output Signals G1 3 Continued Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust D Note P1 3 11 Output frequency limit 1 Supervision value P1 3 12 Output frequency 0 No limit 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision limit 2 supervision P1 3 13 Output frequency limit 2 Supervision value P1 3 14 Torque limit supervision function P1 3 15 Torque limit supervision value P1 3 16 Reference limit supervision 0 No 1 Low limit 2 High limit 0 No 1 Low limit 2 High limit function P1 3 17 Reference limit supervision value P1 3 18 External brake Off delay P1 3 19 External brake On delay P1 3 20 O1 EE Ol Frequency converter 1 Low limit temperature limit supervision 2 High limit NEUEN B EN O N B o O P1 3 21 Frequency converter temperature limit value O P1 3 22 Analog output 2 signal se
116. ed 5 P1 1 21 Preset speed 6 0 00 Par 1 1 2 20 00 EE 129 Multi step speed 6 I 4 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 4 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Continued Code Parameter Mim Mex Unit Default Cust D Noe P11 22 Presetspeed7 000 Pariiz Hz 2280 130 Mulicstep speed Mulstep speede 120 Presar speeds 000 Par 112 Rr 2789 9 Wstep speed Presetspeed T2 000 Par 112 Hr 3500 137 Muhtstep speed 12 P1128 Presetspeed 13 000 Par 112 Hz 4000 138 Mulstepspeedi P1129 Presetspeed 4 000 Par 112 Hz 4500 139 MulWstepspeedi P1130 Presetspeed i 000 Par 112 Hz 6000 140 MulWstepspeedi Input Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 Table 4 4 Input Signals G1 2 e UN NOME MEM P1 2 19 Start Stop logic DN DIN2 Start fwd Start rvs Start Stop Rvs Fwd Start Stop Run enable Start pulse Stop pulse Fwd 9 Rvs 9 Start Stop Rvs Fwd Start Stop Run enable P1 2 2 DINS3 function 0 Not used 1 Ext fault closing cont 2 Ext fault opening cont 3 Run enable 4 Acc Dec time select 5 Force CP to Local 9 6 Force CP to Remote 9 7 Rvs if par 1 2 1 3 8 Jogging speed 9 Fault reset 10 Acc Dec operation prohibit 11 DC Braking command 12 Preset speed P1 2 9 Al1 signal 377 TTF programming method used selecti
117. eeds the limit MN04004001E The limit defined with ID1018 is in percent of the maximum actual value The limit defined with ID1018 is in percent of the maximum actual value The limit defined with ID1018 is in percent of the current value of the reference signal The limit defined with ID1018 is in percent of the current value of the reference signal Actual Value Signal ID1018 30 Actual Value Signal 100 ID1018 60 Actual Value Signal 100 Reference 50 ID1018 60 Limit 60 Reference 30 Actual Value Signal 100 ID1018 140 Limit 140 Reference 70 Reference 50 8 77 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 1020 PID controller bypass 7 P1 9 16 With this parameter the PID controller can be programmed to be bypassed Then the frequency of the controlled drive and the starting points of the auxiliary drives are defined according to the actual value signal See Figure 8 57 Output Freq Max Freq ID102 Start Freq of the Aux Drive 1 Start Freq of the Aux Drive 2 ID1002 bs ID1004 Minimum Freq Sear hha Stop Freq of the Aux OP rE OE MEAUX Drive 2 ID1005 ID101 Drive 1 ID1003 Actual value Maximum of the Minimum of the Actual Value Actual Value Start Start Stop Control of the Freq Converter stop Start Auxiliary Drive 1 stop Stari Auxiliary Drive 2 m Figure
118. eference 1 from keypad 5 Fieldbus reference FBProcessDatalN3 6 Motor potentiometer 7 PID reference 2 from keypad P1 2 1 2 PID error value 1 340 0 No inversion Inversion 1 2 Inversion P1 2 1 3 PID reference 100 0 5 0 341 Time for reference value to rising time change from 096 to 10096 P1 2 1 4 PID reference 100 0 5 0 342 Time for reference value to falling time change from 10096 to 096 P1 2 1 5 PID actual value 7 333 0 Actual value 1 selection 1 Actual 1 Actual 2 2 Actual 1 Actual 2 3 Actual 1 Actual 2 4 Max Actual 1 Actual 2 5 Min Actual 1 Actual 2 6 Mean Actual 1 Actual 2 7 Sqrt Act 1 Sqrt Act 2 P1 2 1 6 Actual value 1 5 2 334 0 Not used selection 1 Al1 2 AI2 3 AI3 4 Al4 5 Fieldbus P1 2 1 7 Actual value 2 5 335 0 Not used selection 1 Al1 2 Al2 3 Al3 4 Al4 5 Fieldbus P1 2 1 8 Actual value 1 1600 0 1600 0 336 0 0 No minimum scaling minimum scale P1 2 1 9 Actual value 1 1600 0 1600 0 100 0 337 100 0 No maximum scaling maximum scale P1 2 1 10 Actual value 2 1600 0 1600 0 338 0 0 No minimum scaling minimum scale P1 2 1 11 Actual value 2 1600 0 1600 0 100 0 339 100 0 No maximum scaling maximum scale P1 2 1 12 Motor 0 1 2000 0 Hz s 10 0 331 potentiometer ramp time MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 13 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 200
119. elections for ID320 Select w e Select 0 100 0 100 0 100 20 100 20 100 20 100 3 jOwommd For selection Customized see ID321 and ID322 Al1 custom setting minimum 34567 P1 2 5 P1 2 17 P1 2 2 4 Al1 custom setting maximum 34567 P1 2 6 P1 2 18 P1 2 2 5 These parameters set the analog input signal for any input signal span within 0 10096 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 323 Al1 signal inversion 3457 P1 2 7 P1 2 19 P1 2 2 6 If this parameter 0 no inversion of analog Vi signal takes place Note In Application 3 Al1 is place B frequency reference if parameter ID131 0 default Output Frequency ID320 2 0 Al1 0 100 ID320 1 Al1 Custom ID322 100 Figure 8 18 Al1 No Signal Inversion If this parameter 1 inversion of analog signal takes place max Al1 signal minimum set speed min Al1 signal maximum set speed Output Frequency ID320 0 Al1 0 100 ID320 1 ID322 100 Figure 8 19 Al1 Signal Inversion For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 23 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 324 Al signal filter time 34567 P1 2 8 P1 2 20 P1 2 2 2 When this parameter is given a value greater than 0 the function that filters out disturbances from the incom
120. ence from AI2 terminals 4 and 5 e g transducer 373 Analog input limit supervision 7 P1 3 2 14 If the value of the selected analog input goes under over the set limit ID374 this function generates a warning message through the digital output or the relay outputs depending on to which output the supervision function ID463 is connected 0 No supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision 8 36 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 374 Analog input supervised value 7 1 3 2 15 The value of the selected analog input to be supervised by ID373 375 Analog output offset 67 P1 3 5 7 P1 3 3 7 Add 100 0 to 100 0 to the analog output 376 PID sum point reference Place 5 P1 2 4 A direct reference Defines which reference source is added to PID controller output if PID controller is 0 No additional reference Direct PID output value 1 PID output Al1 reference from terminals 2 and 3 e g potentiometer 2 PID output Al2 reference from terminals 4 and 5 e g transducer 3 PID output PID keypad reference 4 PID output Fieldbus reference FBSpeedReference 5 PID output Motor potentiometer reference If value 5 is selected for this parameter the values of ID319 and ID301 are automatically set to 13 See Figure 8 33 Figure 8 33 PID Sum Point Reference Note The maximum and minimum limits illustrated in the picture
121. ero speed with controllers active for the time defined by this parameter after reaching the zero speed when a stop command is given This parameter has no effect if the selected stop function ID506 is Coasting See Page A 3 CL Current control P gain 234567 P1 6 12 17 P1 6 15 17 Sets the gain for the current controller This controller is active only in closed loop and advanced open loop modes The controller generates the voltage vector reference to the modulator See Page A 3 CL Encoder filter time 234567 P1 6 12 18 P1 6 15 18 Sets the filter time constant for speed measurement The parameter can be used to eliminate encoder signal noise Too high a filter time reduces speed control stability See Page A 3 CL Slip adjust 234567 P1 6 12 6 P1 6 15 6 The motor name plate speed is used to calculate the nominal slip This value is used to adjust the voltage of motor when loaded The name plate speed is sometimes a little inaccurate and this parameter can therefore be used to trim the slip Reducing the slip adjust value increases the motor voltage when the motor is loaded See Page A 3 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 59 SPX9000 AF Drives 8 60 620 621 622 623 625 626 627 628 631 632 633 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 CL Load drooping 234567 P1 6 12 4 P1 6 15 4 The drooping function enables speed drop as a function of load This parameter sets th
122. es If you need different values for the field weakening point and the maximum output voltage change these parameters after setting ID110 and ID111 V Hz curve middle point 234567 P1 6 6 frequency If the programmable V Hz curve has been selected with ID108 this parameter defines the middle point frequency of the curve See Figure 8 2 V Hz curve middle point 234567 P1 6 7 voltage If the programmable V Hz curve has been selected with the ID108 this parameter defines the middle point voltage of the curve See Figure 8 2 Output voltage at zero 234567 P1 6 8 frequency If the programmable V Hz curve has been selected with the ID108 this parameter defines the zero frequency voltage of the curve See Figure 8 2 Overvoltage controller 234567 P1 6 10 These parameters allow the under overvoltage controllers to be switched out of operation This may be useful for example if the main supply voltage varies more than 15 to 10 and the application will not tolerate this over undervoltage In this case the regulator controls the output frequency taking the supply fluctuations into account 0 Controller switched off 1 Controller switched on no ramping Minor adjustments of OP frequency are made 2 Controller switched on with ramping Controller adjusts OP freq up to max freq Undervoltage controller 234567 P1 6 11 See ID607 Note Over undervoltage trips may occur when the controllers are switched off 0 C
123. ets or information about the hardware and software see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Expander Boards Control Keypad Menu M6 The M6 menu shows the expander and option boards attached to the control board and board related information For more information see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 27 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 6 28 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 es Chapter 7 Pump and Fan Control Application ASFIFF07 Introduction Select the Pump and Fan Control Application in menu Mb See Chapter 5 of the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual The Pump and Fan Control Application can be used to control one variable speed drive and up to four auxiliary drives The PID controller of the frequency converter controls the speed of the variable speed drive and gives control signals to start and stop the auxiliary drives to control the total flow In addition to the eight parameter groups provided as standard a parameter group for multi pump and fan control functions is available The application has two control places on the I O terminal Place A is the pump and fan control and place B is the direct frequency reference The control place is selected with input DIN6 As already its name tells the Pump and Fan Control Applic
124. eypadreference FariiRartz Rc Direction on keypad T LE IT Reverse request activated from the panel Stop button 114 0 Limited function of Stop button 1 Stop button always enabled System Menu Control Keypad Menu M5 For parameters and functions related to the general use of the drive such as application and language selection customized parameter sets or information about the hardware and software see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Expander Boards Control Keypad Menu M6 The M6 menu shows the expander and option boards attached to the control board and board related information For more information see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 1 5 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 1 6 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 eee Chapter 2 Standard Application SVCHST02 Introduction Select the Standard Application in menu M5 See Chapter 5 of the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual The Standard Application is typically used in pump and fan applications and conveyors for which the Basic Application is too limited but where no special features are needed The Standard Application has the same I O signals and the same control logic as the Basic Application Digital input DIN3 and all the outputs are freely pro
125. f autochange drive 4 or auxiliary drive 4 activated Autochange 5 interlock 7 P1 2 6 22 Contact closed Interlock of autochange drive 5 activated PID reference 2 7 P1 2 6 23 Contact open PID controller reference selected with ID332 Contact closed PID controller keypad reference 2 selected with ID371 Ready 67 P1 3 3 1 P1 3 1 1 The frequency converter is ready to operate Run 67 Pio 8 2 17 53752 The frequency converter is operating the motor is running Fault 67 0 L3 3 3 P 3 1 3 A fault trip has occurred Default programming A 1 for Application 7 and B 2 for Application 6 Inverted fault 67 P1 3 3 4 P1 3 1 4 No fault trip has occurred Warning 67 P1 3 3 5 P1 3 1 5 General warning signal For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 45 SPX9000 AF Drives 437 438 2 439 9 440 9 4419 442 443 2 444 445 9 446 2 447 9 448 8 46 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 External fault or warning 67 P1 3 3 6 P1 3 1 6 Fault or warning depending on ID701 Reference fault or warning 67 P1 3 3 7 P1 3 1 7 Fault or warning depending on ID700 Overtemperature warning 67 P1 3 3 8 P 1 32120 The heatsink temperature exceeds 70 C Reverse 67 P1 3 3 9 P1 3 1 9 The Reverse command has been selected Unrequested direction 67 P1 3 3 10 P1 3 1 10 Motor rotation direction is different from the requested one At speed 67 P1 3 3
126. ference value according to the set acceleration deceleration parameters Use this mode if the motor is coasting when the start command is given with the flying start it is possible to ride through short utility voltage Interruptions 506 Stop Function P1 4 7 Coasting 0 The motor coasts to a halt without any control from the frequency converter after the Stop command Ramp 1 After the Stop command the speed of the motor is decelerated according to the set deceleration parameters If the regenerated energy is high it may be necessary to use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration Normal stop Ramp Run Enable stop coasting 2 After the Stop command the speed of the motor is decelerated according to the set deceleration parameters However when Run Enable is selected the motor coasts to a halt without any control from the frequency converter Normal stop Coasting Run Enable stop ramping 3 The motor coasts to a halt without any control from the frequency converter However when Run Enable signal is selected the speed of the motor is decelerated according to the set deceleration parameters If the regenerated energy is high it may be necessary to use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration 8 52 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 507 508 DC braking current 234567 P1 4 8 Defines the cu
127. frequency increases according to the set start function by ID505 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 55 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 518 Acceleration deceleration ramp 234567 P1 5 3 P1 5 7 speed scaling ratio between prohibit frequency limits Defines the acceleration deceleration time when the output frequency is between the selected prohibit frequency range limits ID509 and ID510 The ramping speed selected acceleration deceleration time 1 or 2 is multiplied with this factor E g value 0 1 makes the acceleration time 10 times shorter than outside the prohibit frequency range limits ID518 0 2 ID510 ID512 ID514 ID509 ID511 ID513 Figure 8 46 Ramp Speed Scaling between Prohibit Frequencies 519 Flux braking current 234567 P1 4 13 Defines the flux braking current value This value can be set between 0 4 Iy and the Current limit 520 Flux brake 234567 P1 4 12 Instead of DC braking flux braking is a useful form of braking for motors s 15 kW When braking is needed the frequency is reduced and the flux in the motor is increased which in turn increases the motor s capability to brake Unlike DC braking the motor speed remains controlled during braking The flux braking can be set ON or OFF 0 Flux braking OFF 1 Flux braking ON Note Flux braking converts the energy into heat in the motor and should be used intermittently to avoid mo
128. frequency Par 1 5 4 Hz 511 0 Not used range 2 low limit P1 5 4 Prohibit frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz 512 0 Not used range 2 high limit P1 5 5 Prohibit frequency Par 1 5 6 Hz 513 0 Not used range 3 low limit P1 5 6 Prohibit frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz 514 0 Not used range 3 high limit 1 5 7 Prohibit acc dec 0 1 10 0 Times 1 0 518 ramp MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 11 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Motor Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 6 Table 5 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust D Note 6 P1 6 2 V Hz optimization 1 Automatic torque boost P1 6 3 V Hz ratio selection 108 1 Squared 2 Programmable 3 Linear with flux optim 3 P1 6 1 Motor control mode i NE 0 Not used 8 1 0 Frequency control 1 Speed control Additionally for SPX 2 Torque control 3 Closed loop speed ctrl 4 Closed loop torque ctrl 5 Adv open loop freq control 6 Advanced open loop speed control EN P1 6 49 Field weakening 00 320 00 Hz 60 00 602 point P1 6 5 Voltage at field 10 00 200 00 100 00 603 n x Unmot weakening point P1 6 6 V Hz curve midpoint frequency m Par us uli 60 00 oem V Hz midfreq P1 6 7 V Hz curve midpoint voltage 100 00 100 00 605 n x Unmot Parameter max value par 1 6 5 P1 6 89 Output voltage at
129. grammable Additional functions Programmable Start Stop and Reverse signal logic Reference scaling One frequency limit supervision Second ramps and S shape ramp programming Programmable start and stop functions DC brake at stop One prohibit frequency area Programmable U f curve and switching frequency Autorestart Motor thermal and stall protection Programmable action off warning fault The parameters of the Standard Application are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual The explanations are arranged according to the individual ID number of the parameter MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 2 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Control I O Table 2 1 Standard Application Default I O Configuration Reference potentiometer Temi Sgmi Deep 1 10 ko OPTA1 po zm 10V Reference output Voltage for potentiometer etc Al1 Analog input voltage range Voltage input frequency reference 0 10V DC Dn a I O Ground Ground for reference and controls Al2 Analog input current range Current input frequency reference 5 nz AE n 6 24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches etc max 0 1A 7 GND I O ground Ground for reference and controls 8 DIN1 Start forward Contact closed start forward programmable DIN2 Start reverse Contact closed start reverse programmable DIN3 External fault input Contact open no fault pro
130. grammable Contact closed fault 11 CMA Common for DIN1 DIN3 Connect to GND or 24V 12 Control voltage output Voltage for switches see 6 13 I O ground Ground for reference and controls 14 DIN4 Multi step speed select 1 DIN4 DIN5 Frequency ref 15 DIN5 Multi step speed select 2 Open Ref U Closed Multi step ref 1 Open Multi step ref 2 Closed Ref l 16 DIN6 Fault reset Contact open no action Contact closed fault reset 17 CMB Common for DIN4 DIN6 Connect to GND or 24V 18 AOT Output frequency Programmable Analog output Range 0 20 mA R max 500 20 DO1 Digital output Programmable READY Open collector x 50 mA Us48 VDC Relay output 1 Bun Relay output 2 FAULT Note For more information on jumper selections see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 p Jumper Block X3 CMA and CMB Grounding ee CMB connected to GND e e CMA connected to GND ele CMB isolated from GND e _ CMA isolated from GND ele CMB and CMA internally connected together isolated from GND Factory default 2 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Standard Application Parameter Lists On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter groups The parameter descriptions are given in Chapter 8 The descriptions are arranged according to the ID number of the parameter
131. h the free analog input signal according to the following formulas Reduced time set acc decel time ID103 ID104 ID502 ID503 divided by the factor R in Figure 8 28 8 32 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Signal Range Figure 8 28 Reduction of Acceleration and Deceleration Times 4 Reduces torque supervision limit Set supervision limit can be reduced with the free analog input signal between 0 and set supervision limit ID349 see Figure 8 29 Torque 100 Par ID349 Figure 8 29 Reduction of Torque Supervision Limit MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 33 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 363 Start Stop logic selection 3 P 1 2 15 place B 0 DIN4 closed contact start forward DIN5 closed contact start reverse Output Frequency Stop Function ID506 Coasting d Figure 8 30 Place B Start Forward Start Reverse D The first selected direction has the highest priority 2 When the DIN4 contact opens the direction of rotation starts to change 8 If Start forward DIN4 and Start reverse DIN5 signals are active simultaneously the Start forward signal DIN4 has priority 1 DIN4 closed contact start open contact stop DIN5 closed contact reverse open contact forward See Figure 8 31 Output Stop Function Frequency ID506 Coasti
132. he signal minimum to be either 0 mA or 4 mA living zero Note the difference in analog output scaling in ID311 Figure 8 15 0 Set minimum value to 0 mA 1 Set minimum value to 4 mA MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 17 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 311 Analog output scale 234567 P1 3 6 P1 3 5 6 P1 3 3 6 Scaling factor for analog output Table 8 7 Analog Output Scaling 100 x VnMotor DC link voltage 1000 V Pl ref value 100 x ref value max PI act value 1 100 x actual value max PI act value 2 10095 x actual value max PI error value 10096 x error value max PI output 100 x output max Analog Output Current ID311 200 ID3102 1 22 Z Max Value 4mA lof Signal Selected by ID307 ID310 0 Figure 8 15 Analog Output Scaling 312 Digital output function 23456 P1 3 7 P1 3 1 2 313 Relay output 1 function 2345 P1 3 8 I 1 3 13 314 Relay output 2 function 2345 P1 3 9 8 18 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 8 8 Output Signals Via DO1 and Output Relays RO1 and RO2 Setting value Signal content 0 Not used Out of operation Digital output DO1 sinks current and programmable relay RO1 RO2 is activated when 6 External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on ID701 7 Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending o
133. iary drives turn off in the opposite order 2 3 1 after the update 3 2 1 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 7 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Pump and fan automatics with interlocks and autochange The above is also applicable if the autochange function is used In addition to the changed and updated start order also the change order of main drives depends on parameter 1 9 23 Interlock 4 o Interlock 3 O O Interlock 2 Off 5 7 On Interlock 1 Off oo ase AGE UO On AwzRuwng J Relay Off Aux 2 Running Control of Rt Racing On Off Interlocks Main Drive Running Max Frequency Aux 1 2 and 3 Start Frequency oe A Main Drive Output Frequency Aux 1 2 and 3 Stop Frequency A l Min Frequency 8 Main Drive NS Amorez PID Output i 2 7 L My Aux Drive 1 d N 1 t Figure 7 3 Example of the Function of the PFC Application with Three Aux Drives 7 8 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 SPX9000 Figure 7 5 Example of 3 Pump Autochange Main Diagram MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 9 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Pump and Fan Control Application Parameter Lists 7 10 On the next pages
134. ibit range 1 range 1 high limit P1 5 3 Skip frequency P1 5 4 511 range 2 low limit P1 5 4 Skip frequency P1 5 3 320 00 Hz 512 10 00 No prohibit range 2 range 2 high limit P1 5 5 Skip frequency P1 5 6 Hz 513 range 3 low limit P1 5 6 Skip frequency P1 5 5 320 00 Hz 514 0 00 No prohibit range 3 range 3 high limit Prohibit acc dec 0 1 10 0 1 0 518 Multiplier for ramp time in ramp prohibit frequency range e g 0 1 10 of normal ramp time Motor Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 6 Table 7 17 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note P1 6 1 Motor control mode 1 0 Frequency control 1 Speed control P1 6 2 V Hz optimization 109 0 Not used 1 Automatic torque boost V Hz ratio selection 108 0 Linear 1 Squared 2 Programmable 3 Linear with flux optim P1 6 49 Field weakening 320 00 60 00 602 point P1 6 5 Voltage at field 10 00 200 00 100 00 603 Nn X VuMotor weakening point P1 6 6 V Hz curve 6 4 mo jeo 00 midpoint frequency V Hz curve s 6 5 m 00 ll n X VuMotor midpoint voltage Parameter max value par 1 6 5 P1 6 8 Output voltage at 40 00 ee Ine X V corer zero frequency P1 6 9 Switching Varies Varies mia See Table 8 12 on Page 8 57 for frequency exact values P1 6 10 Overvoltage 2 1 607 0 Notused controller 1 Used no ramping 2 Used ramping P1 6 11 Undervoltage 1 1 608 0 Not used controller
135. ications are also given NOOR WN 101 102 103 104 105 106 MN04004001E Basic Application Standard Application Local Remote Control Application Multi Step Speed Control Application PID Control Application Multi Purpose Control Application Pump and Fan Control Application Minimum frequency P1 1 P1 1 1 Maximum frequency P1 2 P1 1 2 Defines the frequency limits of the frequency converter The maximum value for these parameters is 320 Hz The software will automatically check the values of ID105 ID106 ID315 and ID728 Acceleration time 1 P1 3 P1 1 3 Deceleration time 1 P1 4 P1 1 4 These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to accelerate from the zero frequency to the set maximum frequency ID102 Preset speed 1 1246 P1 18 P1 1 14 P1 1 15 Preset speed 2 1246 P1 19 P1 1 15 P1 1 16 Parameter values are automatically limited between the minimum and maximum frequencies ID101 ID102 Note the use of the TTF programming method in the Multi Purpose Control Application See ID419 ID420 and ID421 Table 8 1 Preset Speed Multi step speed Multi step speed Speed select 1 DIN4 select 2 DIN5 Bases 0 o For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 107 Current limit P1 5 P1 1 5 This parameter determines the maximum motor current from the frequency converter The parameter value ra
136. ifference speed P1 3 1 12 2 Jogging speed DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUTO 1 443 P1 3 1 13 Remote control DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 active P1 3 1 14 9 External brake DigOUT 0 1 DIigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 control P1 3 1 15 External brake DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 control inverted P1 3 1 16 Output DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 B DigOUT 0 1 I I Ol DigOUT 0 1 frequency limit 1 supervision P1 3 1 17 Output DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 frequency limit 2 supervision P1 3 1 18 Reference limit DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 supervision P1 3 1 19 Temperature DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 limit supervision P1 3 1 20 Torque limit DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 451 supervision P1 3 1 21 Motor thermal DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 452 protection P1 3 1 22 9 Analog input DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 m DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT 0 1 T DigOUT 0 1 I Ol IA I supervision limit P1 3 1 23 Motor regulator DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 454 activation MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 1 N SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 7 10 Output Signals Digital Outputs G1 3 1 Continued Code parameter Win Max Unit Default Cust ID Woe P1 3 1 24 9 Fieldbus digital DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 455 input 1 P1 3 1 25 Fieldbu
137. igure A 1 Torque Limit ID349 Frequency Limit Brake On Figure A 1 Brake Control with Additional Limits In Figure A 1 the brake control is set to react to both the torque supervision limit ID349 and frequency supervision limit ID347 Additionally the same frequency limit is used for both brake off and brake on control by giving ID346 the value 4 Use of two different frequency limits is also possible Then ID315 and ID346 must be given the value 3 Brake off In order for the brake to release three conditions must be fulfilled 1 the drive must be in Run state 2 the torque must be over the set limit if used and 3 the output frequency must be over the set limit if used For more information visit www EatonElectrical com A 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Brake on Stop command activates the brake delay count and the brake is closed when the output frequency falls below the set limit ID315 or ID346 As a precaution the brake closes when the brake on delay expires at the latest Note A fault or Stop state will close the brake immediately without a delay See Figure A 2 Note It is strongly advisable that the brake on delay be set longer than the ramp time in order to avoid damaging of the brake No brake off control 0 2 ID346 Brake off ctrl 2 limits 3 Brake on off ctrl 1 limit 4 Brake Off TRUE Ponte Output Frequency 2 ID347 No brake off control ID348 n Brak
138. ime has elapsed and the next fault starts the trial time count again If a single fault remains during the trial time a fault state is true 719 Automatic restart Start 234567 P1 8 3 function The Start function for Automatic restart is selected with this parameter The parameter defines the start mode 0 Start with ramp 1 Flying start 2 Start according to ID505 8 68 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 720 Automatic restart Number of 234567 P1 8 4 tries after undervoltage fault trip This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the trial time set by ID718 after an undervoltage trip 0 No automatic restart gt 0 Number of automatic restarts after undervoltage fault The fault is reset and the drive is started automatically after the DC link voltage has returned to the normal level 721 Automatic restart Number of 234567 P1 8 5 tries after overvoltage trip This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the trial time set by ID718 after an overvoltage trip 0 No automatic restart after overvoltage fault trip gt 0 Number of automatic restarts after overvoltage fault trip The fault is reset and the drive is started automatically after the DC link voltage has returned to the normal level 722 Automatic restart Number of 234567 P1 8 6 tries after overcurrent trip This pa
139. imit at which the PT100 fault F56 will be activated For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 71 SPX9000 AF Drives 8 72 850 851 852 859 E T N Cutler Hammer Fieldbus reference minimum 6 P1 9 1 scaling Fieldbus reference maximum 6 P1 9 2 scaling August 2005 Use these two parameters to scale the fieldbus reference signal Setting value limits 0 lt ID850 lt ID851 lt ID102 If ID851 0 custom scaling is not used and the minimum and maximum frequencies are used for scaling The scaling functions as illustrated in Figure 8 10 See Page A 5 Note Using this custom scaling function also affects the scaling of the actual value Fieldbus data out selections 6 P1 9 3 to P1 9 10 1 to 8 Using these parameters you can observe any monitored item or parameter from the fieldbus Enter the ID number of the item you wish to observe for its value See Page A 5 Some typical values Table 8 13 Typical Monitored Items Item Description Description 1 output trequency 18 2 Motorspeed fre 3 Motorcurrent 7 4 Motortorque 28 5 Metorpower 28 Motor voltage 2 EN 7 ociink votage 2 8 Untemperatue 5 S Motortempersture 3 mw a E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 Number of auxilia
140. ing analog signal is activated A long filtering time makes the regulation response slower See Figure 8 20 Unfiltered Signal Filtered Signal Figure 8 20 Al1 Signal Filtering 325 Analog input Al2 signal range 34567 P1 2 10 P1 2 22 P1 2 3 3 Table 8 10 Selections for Parameter ID325 meo epo 7 o 0 20mA 20mA 0 20mA 100 100 _ C 20 rn 4 mA 20 100 20 100 20 10096 Boe estonia Output Frequency ID325 1 Al2 20 100 Al2 Term 3 4 Figure 8 21 Analog Input Al2 Scaling 8 24 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 Analog input Al2 custom 34567 P1 2 11 P1 2 23 P1 2 3 4 setting min Analog input Al2 custom 34567 P1 2 12 P1 2 24 P1 2 3 5 setting max These parameters set Al2 for any input signal span within 0 100 Analog input Al2 inversion 3457 P1 2 13 F 122 25 1 2 3 5 See ID323 Note In Application 3 Al2 is the place A frequency reference if 1D117 1 default Analog input Al2 lin filter time 34567 P1 2 14 P1 2 25 P1 2 3 2 See ID324 DIN5 function 5 P1 2 3 The digital input DIN5 has 14 possible functions If it is not used set the value to 0 The selections are the same as in ID319 except 13 Enable PID reference 2 Contact open PID controller reference selected with ID332 Contac
141. ion parameter ID Torque Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G7 10 Table 6 24 Torque Control Parameters G1 10 poe EE foetet oe po ee P1 10 1 Torque limit 0 0 400 0 400 0 P1 10 2 Torque limit 32000 3000 LN control P gain P1 10 3 Torque limit 32000 611 control l gain Torque reference 0 Not used selection 5 All joystick 6 Al2 joystick 7 Torque reference from keypad R2 4 8 Fieldbus P1 10 7 0 Max frequency 1 Selected freq reference 2 Preset speed 7 P1 10 8 Minimum frequency for open loop torque control P1 10 9 Torque controller P gain P1 10 10 Torque controller gain 6 26 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Keypad Control Control Keypad Menu M2 The parameters for the selection of control place and direction on the keypad are listed below See the Keypad control menu in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Table 6 25 Keypad Control Parameters M2 mo OM e R2 1 Keypad reference Par Par 1 1 2 1 1 1 inal m 123 0 Forward 1 Reverse Stop button 114 0 Limited function of Stop button 1 Stop button always A R24 Torque Torque reference Torque reference 00 100 0 00 System Menu Control Keypad Menu M5 For parameters and functions related to the general use of the drive such as application and language selection customized parameter s
142. isit www EatonElectrical com 1 3 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Basic Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 1 Table 1 3 Basic Parameters G1 Pe E ue mes D res Ier D eie P1 1 Min frequency 101 Loa 2 Max frequency EN 1 1 320 x Hz a 00 NOTE If fmax gt than the motor synchronous speed check suitability for motor and drive 0 1 mu Hg Pia 3000 0 s e Oa Pis eein S0 x A har T 60 Nominal voltage of the 180 Loa 230V He n the rating plate of the motor SPX5 460V motor SPX6 690V P1 70 Nominal frequency of 30 00 mand 00 ES dll 00 111 Check the rating plate of the the motor motor P1 80 Nominal speed of the 300 m 000 ul nal 112 Check the rating plate of the motor motor The default applies for a 4 pole motor and a nominal size frequency converter P1 90 Nominal current of the 0 4 xl 2 x lH 113 Check the rating plate of the motor motor P1 10 Power Factor E NN 85 a i Check the rating plate of the motor P1 11 Start function 0 Ramp 1 Flying start P1 12 Stop function 0 Coasting 1 Ramp 2 Ramp Run enable coast 3 Coast Run enable ramp P1 13 Local Control 1 I O Terminal Place d Keypad d Fieldbus P1 14 Remote Control NEN 1 I O Terminal Place 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus P1 15 Remote reference P1 16 V Hz optimization P1 17 Current reference offset P1 18 Analog output
143. k feedback signals come from the digital inputs selected with parameters 1 2 6 18 to 1 2 6 21 The Auxiliary drive 1 control par 1 3 1 27 is enabled through Interlock 1 par 1 2 6 18 the Auxiliary drive 2 control par 1 3 1 28 through Interlock 2 par 1 2 6 19 etc The system and the motor controlled by the frequency converter are started The Auxiliary drive 1 starts when the main drive reaches the starting frequency set par 1 9 2 The main drive decreases speed down to Auxiliary drive 1 Stop frequency par 1 9 3 and starts to rise toward the Start frequency of Auxiliary drive 2 if needed The Auxiliary drive 2 starts when the main drive has reached the starting frequency set par 1 9 4 The Interlock feedback is removed from Aux drive 2 Because the Aux drive 3 is unused it will be started to replace the removed Aux drive 2 The main drive increases speed to maximum because no more auxiliary drives are available The removed Aux drive 2 is reconnected and placed last in the auxiliary drive start order which now is 1 3 2 The main drive decreases speed to the set Stop frequency The auxiliary drive start order will be updated either immediately or in the next Stop autochange sleep stop etc according to par 1 9 23 If still more power is needed the main drive speed rises up to the maximum frequency placing 10096 of the output power in the system s disposal When the need of power decreases the auxil
144. l 6 Not used 7 Force Remote 8 Forward Reverse 9 Jogging frequency cc 10 Fault reset cc 11 Acc Dec prohibit cc 12 DC braking command 13 Motor pot UP cc 9 P1 2 2 DIN3 function P1 2 3 DIN5 function 330 See above except 12 Enable PID reference 2 P1 2 4 PID sum point 0 Direct PID output value reference 1 Al1 PID output 2 AI2 PID output 3 AI3 PID output 4 Al4 PID output 5 PID keypad PID output 6 Fieldbus PID output ProcessDatalN3 7 Mot pot PID output 3 Actual 1 Actual 2 4 Max Actual 1 Actual 2 5 Min Actual 1 Actual 2 6 Mean Actual 1 Actual2 7 Sart Act1 Sqrt Act2 0 Not used 1 Al1 signal c board 2 Al2 signal c board 3 AI3 4 Al4 5 Fieldbus ProcessDatalN2 6 Motor torque 7 Motor speed 8 Motor current P1 2 5 Actual value 0 Actual value 1 selection 1 Actual 1 Actual 2 P1 2 6 Actual value 1 selection 2 Actual 1 Actual 2 CP control place cc closing contact oc opening contact 9 Motor power 10 Encoder frequency 5 6 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 5 4 Input Signals G1 2 Continued Code Parameter Mi Max Unit Default Cust D Note Actual value 2 input P1 2 7 P1 2 8 Actual value 1 1000 0 1000 0 336 0 No minimum scaling minimum sca
145. l output Programmable READY Open collector x 50 mA U lt 48V DC Relay output 1 Programmable Relay output 2 Programmable Note For more information on jumper selections see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 P Jumper Block X3 CMA and CMB Grounding ee CMB connected to GND e CMA connected to GND ele CMB isolated from GND ele CMA isolated from GND ele CMB and CMA internally connected together isolated from GND Factory default 5 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 PID Control Application Parameter Lists On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter groups The parameter descriptions are given in Chapter 8 Column explanations Code Location indication on the keypad Shows the operator the present parameter number Parameter Name of parameter Min Minimum value of parameter Max Maximum value of parameter Unit Unit of parameter value Given if available Default Value preset by factory Cust Customer s own setting ID D number of the parameter Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has been stopped o Use TTF method to program these parameters See Page 6 3 Monitoring Values Control Keypad Menu M7 The monitoring values are the actual values of parameters and signals as well as statuses and measurements Monit
146. lay P1 3 4 10 External brake on 100 0 1 5 353 delay P1 3 4 11 FC temperature 2 354 0 Not used supervision 1 Low limit 2 High limit P1 3 4 12 FC temperature 10 75 1C 355 supervised value MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 17 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 6 14 Limit Settings G1 3 4 Continued Code Parameter M Max Unit Default Gust ID Nos P1 3 4 13 On Off control PP PT 356 0 Not used P1 3 4 14 On Off control low Par 1 3 4 15 96 10 00 357 limit P1 3 4 15 On Off control Par 1 3 4 14 100 00 90 00 358 high limit Analog Output 1 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 5 Table 6 15 Analog Output 1 Parameters G1 3 5 Code Parameter M Max Unit Default Gust ID Nos P1 3 5 1 Analog output 1 A 1 signal selection Analog output 1 14 1 307 0 Not used function 1 Output freq 0 f 2 Freq reference 0 f 3 Motor speed 0 Motor nominal speed 4 Motor current 0 Innotor 5 Motor torque 0 ThMotor 6 Motor power 0 Pamotor 7 Motor voltage 0 Unnotor 8 DC Bus volt 0 1000V 9 Al1 10 Al2 11 Output freq fmin fmax 12 Motor torque 2 2XTNmot 13 Motor power 2 2XTNmot 14 PT100 temperature 15 Fieldbus analog output P1 3 5 3 Analog output 1 10 00 1 00 308 0 No filtering filter time P1 3 5 4 Analog output 1 1 309 0 Not
147. le P1 2 9 Actual value 1 1000 0 1000 0 337 100 No maximum scaling maximum scale P1 2 10 Actual value 2 1000 0 1000 0 338 0 2 No minimum scaling minimum scale P1 2 11 Actual value 2 1000 0 1000 0 100 0 339 100 No maximum scaling maximum scale A 1 377 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 Al1 signal range 2 320 0 Signal range 0 10096 9 1 Signal range 20 100 2 Custom range P1 2 14 Al1 custom 100 00 321 minimum setting P1 2 15 Al1 custom 100 00 100 00 322 maximum setting P1 2 16 Al1 inversion 1 323 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted P1 2 182 AI2 signal selection A 2 388 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 2 1 325 0 20 20mA9 1 4 20 mA 2 Customized 9 pe a 00 100 0 335 0 Not used 1 Al1 signal c board 2 Al2 signal c board 5 Fieldbus ProcessDatalN3 6 Motor torque 7 Motor speed 8 Motor current 9 Motor power P1 2 12 Al1 signal selection P1 2 13 P1 2 19 P1 2 20 Al2 custom minimum setting P1 2 21 Al2 custom maximum setting P1 2 23 Al2 filter time P1 2 24 Motor potentiometer ramp time Al2 signal range 328 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 030 WS 0 Nofiterng EN l B PP lb o 2 1 367 0 No reset 1 Reset if stopped or powered down 2 Reset if powered down Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 P1 2 25 Motor potentiometer frequency referenc
148. lection P1 3 23 Analog output 2 function P1 3 24 Analog output 2 filter time P1 3 25 Analog output 2 1 inversion P1 3 26 Analog output 2 1 minimum P1 3 27 Analog output 2 10 1000 A 100 scaling 471 TTF programming method used See Page 6 3 472 Same as parameter 1 3 2 1 00 473 0 No filtering 474 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted Q9 8 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Drive Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 4 Table 3 6 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Defau Cust ID Noe P1 4 1 Ramp 1 shape 10 0 500 0 Linear gt 0 S curve ramp time P1 4 2 Ramp 2 shape 10 0 501 0 Linear gt 0 S curve ramp time 3000 0 3000 0 P1 4 3 Acceleration time 2 P1 4 4 Deceleration time 2 Brake chopper i P1 4 8 DC braking 0 4 x lj 2 X ly current P1 4 9 DC braking time 600 00 at stop P1 4 10 Frequency to 10 00 Hz start DC braking during ramp stop P1 4 11 DC braking time 600 00 at start P1 4 12 Flux brake r P1 4 13 Flux braking 0 4 x lj 2 X ly current EI SJ o 0 Disabled 1 Used when running 2 External brake chopper 3 Used when stopped running 4 Used when running no testing 0 Ramp 1 Flying start 0 Coasting 1 Ramp 2 Ramp Run enable coast 3 Coast Run enable ramp Ol O1 EL je O O1
149. lt Cust D Noe P1231 AB signal selection Anino Annen ana 398 ooo P1232 AZfter me 0 00 1o00 s 010 979 _ 0 Nofiteing P1 2 3 3 AI2 signal range 2 325 0 Signal range 0 100969 1 Signal range 20 100 2 Custom range P1 2 3 4 AI2 custom 160 00 160 00 A 326 minimum setting P1 2 3 5 AI2 custom 160 00 160 00 A 100 00 327 maximum setting P1 2 3 6 Al2 signal inversion 320 00 Hz 328 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 7 14 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Analog Input 3 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 4 Table 7 7 Input Signals Analog Input 3 G1 2 4 Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust D Note P1241 APB signal selection Anno anne anoa Wi wo fs fom Wz 0 Nofitering P1 2 4 3 AI3 signal range 2 143 0 Signal range 0 100 1 Signal range 20 100 2 Custom range molo P1 2 4 5h AI3 custom 100 00 100 00 100 00 145 maximum setting P1 2 4 6 Al3 inversion 1 151 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 Analog Input 4 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 5 Table 7 8 Input Signals Analog Input 4 G1 2 5 Code Parameter Min Mex Unit Default Cust ID
150. m setting maximum 67 P1 2 4 5 Set the custom minimum and maximum levels for the AI3 signal from 0 to 100 AI3 signal inversion 567 P1 2 40 P1 2 4 6 0 No inversion 1 Signal inverted Al4 signal selection 567 P1 2 42 P1 2 5 1 See ID141 Al4 filter time 567 P1 2 45 P1 2 5 2 See ID142 Al4 signal range 567 P1 2 43 P1 2 5 3 See ID143 Al4 custom setting minimum 67 P1 2 5 4 Al4 custom setting maximum 67 P 1 2 5 5 See ID144 and ID145 Al4 signal inversion 567 P1 2 44 P1 2 5 6 See ID151 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 164 165 166 169 170 171 amp 172 173 Motor control mode 1 2 6 P1 2 7 22 Contact is open Motor control mode 1 is selected Contact is closed Motor control mode 2 is selected See ID600 and ID521 AI joystick offset 6 P1 2 2 11 Define the frequency zero point as follows With this parameter being displayed place the potentiometer at the assumed zero point and press ENTER on the keypad Note This will not change the reference scaling Press the RESET button to change the parameter value back to 0 00 Al2 joystick offset 6 P1 2 3 11 See ID165 Fieldbus input data 4 6 P1 3 3 27 FBFixedControlWord bit 6 Fieldbus input data 5 6 P1 3 3 28 FBFixedControlWord bit 7 The data from the fieldbus FBFixedControlWord can be led to the digital
151. m vii SPX9000 AF Drives EXCRNERST Safety E T N Cutler Hammer Definitions and Symbols A WARNING This symbol indicates high voltage It calls your attention to items or operations that could be dangerous to you and other persons operating this equipment Read the message and follow the instructions carefully A This symbol is the Safety Alert Symbol It occurs with either of two signal words CAUTION or WARNING as described below A WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in serious injury or death A CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in minor to moderate injury or serious damage to the product The situation described in the CAUTION may if not avoided lead to serious results Important safety measures are described in CAUTION as well as WARNING Hazardous High Voltage viii A WARNING Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are connected to hazardous line voltages When servicing drives and electronic controllers there may be exposed components with housings or protrusions at or above line potential Extreme care should be taken to protect against shock Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only one hand when checking components Always work with another person in case an emergency occurs Disconnect power before checking controllers or performing maintenance Be
152. mits see ID348 and ID349 Motor thermal protection 67 i 1 3 3 2 P 1 37 21 Motor thermistor initiates an overtemperature signal which can be tied to a digital output Note This parameter will not work unless you have an OPTA3 or OPTB2 thermistor relay board connected Motor regulator activation 67 IP h3 3 235 P 53 1 23 Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator has been activated Fieldbus input data 1 67 P1 3 3 24 P1 3 1 24 FBFixedControlWord bit 3 Fieldbus input data 2 67 P1 3 3 25 P1 3 1 25 FBFixedControlWord bit 4 Fieldbus input data 3 67 P1 3 3 26 P1 3 1 26 FBFixedControlWord bit 5 The data from the fieldbus FBFixedControlWord can be tied to frequency converter digital outputs Autochange 1 Auxiliary drive 1 7 P1 3 1 27 control Control signal for autochange auxiliary drive 1 Default programming B 1 Autochange 2 Auxiliary drive 2 7 P1 3 1 28 control Control signal for autochange auxiliary drive 2 Default programming B 2 Autochange 3 Auxiliary drive3 7 P1 3 1 29 control Control signal for autochange auxiliary drive 3 If three or more auxiliary drives are used we recommend the use of a relay output to connect drive 3 Since the OPTA2 board only has two relay outputs it is advisable to purchase an I O expander board with extra relay outputs e g OPTB5 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 47 SPX9000 AF Drives 8 48 461 462 463 9 464
153. mmable Contact closed Control place B is active 17 CMB Common for DIN4 DIN6 Connect to GND or 24V 18 AOT Output frequency Programmable See Tables 7 12 7 13 AO1 Analog output and 7 14 GND Range 0 20 mA R max 500 DO1 Digital output Programmable FAULT Open collector lt 50 mA V 48V DC EE eoa pT Relay output 1 Programmable see Table 7 10 Relay output 2 Programmable see Table 7 10 Note For more information on jumper selections see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 Jumper Block X3 f CMB connected to GND CMA and CMB CMA connected to GND Grounding ele CMB isolated from GND e CMA isolated from GND e CMB and CMA internally connected together isolated from GND rn Factory default 7 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 230V AC SPX9000 OPTA2 9 DIN2 Autom 0 Line Autom 0 Line RN ION RE eee UN MERO NEED WOES EE S1 NE S2 N M1 SPX9000 M1 Line M2 SPX9000 M2 Line Figure 7 1 2 Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 7 3 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 230V AC SPX9000 OPTA1 DIN3 K2 K1 1 K1 K1 KLETE K2L K2 31L K3 LT 3 E M1 SPX9000 M1 Line M2 SPX9000 M2 Line M1 SPX9000 M3 Line Figure 7 2 3 Pump Autochange
154. motor the larger the motor the longer the time constant The time constant is the time within which the calculated thermal stage has reached 63 of its final value The motor thermal time is specific to the motor design and it varies between different motor manufacturers If the motor s t6 time t6 is the time in seconds the motor can safely operate at six times the rated current is known given by the motor manufacturer the time constant parameter can be set based on it As a rule of thumb the motor thermal time constant in minutes is equal to 2xt6 If the drive is in stop stage the time constant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value The cooling in the stop stage is based on convection and the time constant is increased See Figure 8 48 Motor Temperature Trip Area ID704 Changes by motor size and adjusted with ID707 Figure 8 48 Motor Temperature Calculation 708 Motor thermal protection 234567 J P1 7 12 Motor duty cycle Defines how much of the nominal motor load is applied The value can be set to 0 100 See Page A 4 709 Stall protection 234567 P1 7 13 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting Setting the parameter to 0 will deactivate the protection and reset the stall time counter See Page A 4 8 64 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer
155. n ID700 e if analog reference is 4 20 mA and signal is lt 4 mA The reverse command has been selected 10 Preset speed 1 Application 2 The preset speed has been selected with digital input 10 Jogging speed Applications 3456 The jogging speed has been selected with digital input 11 At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference 12 Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated 13 Output frequency limit supervision The output frequency is outside the set supervision low limit high limit ID315 and ID316 14 Control from I O terminals I O control mode selected in menu M2 Application 2 14 Output frequency limit 2 supervision The output frequency goes outside the set supervision low Applications 3456 limit high limit ID346 and ID347 15 Thermistor fault or warning The thermistor input of option board indicates Application 2 overtemperature Fault or warning depending on ID732 15 Torque limit supervision The motor torque is beyond the set supervision low limit Applications 3456 high limit ID348 and ID349 16 Fieldbus input data Fieldbus input data FBFixedControlWord to DO RO Application 2 16 Reference limit supervision Active reference goes beyond the set supervision low limit Applications 3456 high limit ID350 and ID351 17 External brake control External brake ON OFF control with programmable delay Applications 3456 ID352 and ID353 1
156. n ME P1 2 5 19 Al4 signal 152 selection Al4 signal range me 0 0 100 1 20 100 2 10V 10V 3 Custom range P1 2 5 4 Al4 custom 100 00 100 00 155 minimum setting P1 2 5 5 Al4 custom 100 00 100 00 100 00 156 maximum setting P1 2 5 6 AI4 signal 162 Not inverted inversion Inverted 6 12 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Free Analog Input Signal Selection Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 2 6 Table 6 9 Free Analog Input Signal Selection G1 2 6 Code Parameter Min Mex Unit Default Gust i0 P1 2 6 1 Scaling of current 0 Not used limit 5 Fieldbus FBProcessDatalN2 neu 2 6 2 Scaling of DC See par 1 2 6 1 nnl current P1 2 6 3 Reducing of acc 401 See par 1 2 6 1 dec times Reducing of 402 See par 1 2 6 1 torque supervision limit Digital Inputs Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 2 7 Table 6 10 Digital Input Signals G1 2 7 Code parameter Mm Default Gust b Note mz Seen p m 9 P272 sensoa p f po P1273 Runenae 0 foz aor Motor siar enabied e P1 2 7 42 Reverse 0 1 412 Direction forward oc 9 ram pee NN ep SS o fot Els 3 5 P1 2 7 7 2 Preset speed3 speed 3 Presetspeed3 0 for NEN per Mot pot GL decreases cc 9 P1 2 7 89 Motor potentiometer reference DOWN P1 2 7 9 9 t potenti
157. nedeceg ene bbb Ga gee ae beeee eee oe 7 13 UOT SIC Gls ess tease ca hee pinus s Re CERCA ORNA pee mate Xd Site uai RE RR DRE Gee es 7 17 il For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table of Contents continued CHAPTER 8 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 2 0000 c eee eee eens 8 1 IGTtEOOUELIOIT S 2n 224 560 2 55 tahoe ne ce ede tone tee 45249155 eee eet oe oes 8 1 Keypad Control Parameters 0 0000 cee ee hn 8 84 APPENDIX A ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 0000 eee eee eee eee A 1 External Brake Control with Additional Limits eee eee eee A 1 Closed Loop Parameters 3x rw wie sa eee eae eee nea ee Can eee A 3 Advanced Open Loop ParametersS 0 000 cece ee ees A 3 Parameters of Motor Thermal Protection leeren A 4 Parameters of Stall Protection leere RR IRR RR I 4 A 4 Parameters of Underload Protection 0 000 eee eee ee eee eee A 5 Fieldbus Control Parameters 0000 ce eee ee RR RR hr A 5 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com Hl SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 List of Figures Figure 6 1 Defining Input Output Function leere 6 3 Figure 6 2 Defining Input Output Values leeren 6 3 Figure 6 3 Screenshot of 9000X Drive Programming Tool Entering the Address Code cece een
158. nformation visit www EatonElectrical com 8 79 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 1025 Frequency drop delay after 7 P1 9 21 starting auxiliary drive 1026 Frequency increase delay after 7 P1 9 22 stopping auxiliary drive If the speed of auxiliary drive increases slowly e g in soft starter control then a delay between the start of auxiliary drive and the frequency drop of the adjustable frequency drive will make the control smoother This delay can be adjusted with ID1025 In the same way if the speed of the auxiliary drives decreases slowly a delay between the auxiliary drive stop and the frequency increase of the adjustable frequency drive can be programmed with ID1026 See Figure 8 60 If either of the values of ID1025 or ID1026 is set to maximum 300 0 s no frequency drop nor increase takes place Output Frequency Start Freq of Aux Drive 1 Hz Stop Freq of Aux Drive 1 Hz Time Frequency Aux Drive ID1025 p Increase Delay ID1010 StopDelay J D1026 of Aux Drive PB ID1011 Aux Drive Control Speed Figure 8 60 Frequency Drop and Increase Delays Frequenc Start Delay of J Drop Delay 1027 Autochange 7 P1 9 24 0 Autochange not used 1 Autochange used 8 80 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 1028 Autochange interlocks 7 P1 9 25 automatics selection 0 Automa
159. ng Figure 8 31 Place B Start Stop Reverse 8 34 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 364 365 2 DIN4 closed contact start open contact stop DIN5 closed contact start enabled open contact start disabled and drive stopped if running 3 3 wire connection pulse control DIN4 closed contact start pulse DIN5 open contact stop pulse DIN3 can be programmed for reverse command See Figure 8 32 Output If Start and Stop pulses are Frequency Stop Function simultaneous the Stop pulse ID506 Coasting overrides the Start pulse Figure 8 32 Place B Start Pulse Stop Pulse Selections 4 to 6 are used to exclude the possibility of an unintentional start when for example power is connected re connected after a power failure after a fault reset after the drive is stopped by Run Enable Run Enable False or when the control place is changed The Start Stop contact must be opened before the motor can be started 4 DIN4 closed contact start forward Rising edge required to start DIN5 closed contact start reverse Rising edge required to start 5 DIN4 closed contact start Rising edge required to start open contact stop DIN5 closed contact reverse open contact forward 6 DIN4 closed contact start Rising edge required to start open contact stop DIN5 closed contact s
160. ng Previous Freq 3 Wrng PresetFreq 1 7 2 4 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 5 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 2 4mA reference fault Par 1 1 2 Hz 728 frequency P1 7 3 Response to external 3 2 701 0 No response ere trae A IP D J 7 az Wamins P1 7 4 Input phase 3 730 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 m M FK 1T 1 i henner P1 7 5 Response to 1 3 2 727 undervoltage fault P1 7 6 Output phase 3 2 702 supervision 3 Pr77 Earth fault protection 0 3 j a 2 704 P1 7 8 Thermal protection of 3 the motor P1 7 9 Motor ambient 100 0 100 0 705 PITS Heemperaturetactor fe eT P1 7 10 Motor cooling factor at 150 0 706 UN T fe fee ee BEM P1 7 11 Motor thermal time 1 200 min 45 707 constant SS P1 7 12 Motor duty cycle Stall protection 708 709 aie 2 720 00 s 1500 P1 7 13 P1 7 14 Stall current P1 7 15 Stall time limit P1 7 16 Stall frequency limit P1 7 17 Underload protection P1 7 18 Field weakening area load P1 7 19 Zero frequency load P1 7 20 Underload protection time limit P1 7 21 Response to thermistor fault 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting 711 0 1 00 0 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting SIN N W N O N D N Ol Bi i 2 3 3 LL Nn pc N O N CO N 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop a
161. nge differs from size to size 108 V Hz ratio selection 234567 P1 6 3 Linear 0 The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point where the nominal voltage is supplied to the motor A linear V Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications This default setting should be used if there is no special need for another setting Squared 1 The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve form with the frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point where the nominal voltage is supplied to the motor The motor runs under magnetized below the field weakening point and produces less torque and electromechanical noise A squared V Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand of the load is proportional to the square of the speed e g in centrifugal fans and pumps ID603 Default Nominal Field Weakening Voltage of the Motor Point Default Nominal Frequency of the Motor y Figure 8 1 Linear and Squared Change of Motor Voltage Programmable V Hz curve 2 The V Hz curve can be programmed with three different points A programmable V Hz curve can be used if the other settings do not satisfy the needs of the application 8 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 109 Default Nominal Field Weake
162. ning Voltage of the Motor Point ID605 Default 1096 Default Nominal Frequency of the ID606 Motor f Hz Default 1 396 A Default 5 Hz Figure 8 2 Programmable V Hz Curve Linear with flux optimization 3 The frequency converter starts to search for the minimum motor current in order to save energy lower the disturbance level and the noise This function can be used in applications with constant motor load such as fans pumps etc V Hz optimization P1 13 P1 6 2 Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which makes the motor torque produce sufficient torque to start and run at low frequencies The voltage boost increase depends on the motor type and power Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where starting torque due to starting friction is high e g in conveyors Example What changes are required to start the load from 0 Hz e First set the motor nominal values Parameter group 1 1 Option 1 Activate the Automatic torque boost Option 2 Programmable V Hz curve To obtain the required torque the zero point voltage and midpoint voltage frequency in parameter group 1 6 need to be set so that the motor can draw enough current at the low frequencies First set parameter ID108 to Programmable V Hz curve value 2 Increase the zero point voltage ID606 to get enough current at zero speed Then set the midpoint voltage ID605 to 1 4142 ID606 and the midpoint frequency ID
163. nit Default Cust ID Noe Pitt Min frequency 0 00 Par t12 Az ooo po P1 1 2 Max frequency Par 1 1 1 320 00 Hz 60 00 102 NOTE If fmax gt than the motor synchronous speed check suitability for motor and drive system P1 1 3 Acceleration time 1 0 1 3000 0 1 0 103 NOTE If PID controller is used Acceleration time 2 par 1 4 3 is automatically applied P1 1 4 Deceleration time 1 3000 0 rm NOTE If PID controller is used A js Deceleration time 2 par 1 4 4 is automatically applied P1 1 6 Nominal voltage of 18 V SPX2 230V the motor SPX4 460V SPXb 690V 0 LANE uM 111 Check the rating plate of the motor The default applies for a 4 pole motor and a nominal size frequency converter 113 Check the rating plate of the motor 120 Check the rating plate of the motor 1 I O Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 172 1 1 O0 Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus P1 1 7 Nominal frequency 30 00 320 00 Hz 60 00 of the motor P1 1 9 Nominal current of O 4 xli 2xIy A lu the motor P1 1 10 Power Factor NN Poff fp OM LIP 1 00 3 N a 0 P1 1 8 Nominal speed of 300 20 000 rpm 1720 the motor 0 NO 5 4 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 5 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Continued Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust D P1 1 13 Loc
164. o zero See Figure 8 52 and Page A 5 Underload Time Counter Trip Area Trip Warning Underload No Underload Figure 8 52 Underload Time Counter Function 717 Automatic restart Wait time 234567 P1 8 1 Defines the time before the frequency converter tries to automatically restart the motor after the fault has disappeared MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 67 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 718 Automatic restart Trial time 234567 J P1 8 2 The Automatic restart function restarts the frequency converter when the faults selected with ID720 to ID725 have cleared and the waiting time has elapsed Wait Time Wait Time Wait Time Par ID717 Par ID7 17 Par ID717 S Fault Trigger Motor Stop Signal Restart 1 Restart 2 Motor Start Signal Supervision 3 Trial Time Par ID718 l Fault State Active o S L RESET Fault Reset tl Auto Function Trials 2 Figure 8 53 Example of Automatic Restarts with Two Restarts ID720 to ID725 determine the maximum number of automatic restarts during the trial time set by ID718 The time count starts from the first autorestart If the number of faults occurring during the trial time exceeds the values of ID720 to ID725 the fault state becomes active Otherwise the fault is cleared after the trial t
165. oad protection time limit 14 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 21 Response to thermistor fault O1 E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 5 9 Protections G1 7 Continued luem ee P1 7 22 Response to 733 See P1 7 21 fieldbus fault fault ae to PT100 ese response fault 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting Firat Frio unt 300 aeo e 89 1 Autorestart Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 8 Table 5 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 Code Parameter Min Mex Unit Dett Cust D Note mu EM M a P1 8 3 Start function um 0 Ramp 1 Flying start 2 According to par 1 4 6 P1 8 4 Number of tries after undervoltage trip P1 8 5 Number of tries 10 721 after overvoltage trip P1 8 6 Number of tries after overcurrent trip P1 8 7 Number of tries 723 after reference trip P1 8 8 Number of tries 726 after motor temp fault trip P1 8 9 Number of tries 10 725 after external fault trip P1 8 10 Number of tries 10 1 738 after underload fault trip MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 15 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Keypad Control Control Keypad Menu M2 The parameters for the selection of con
166. oder speed and direction V7 3 2 2 Change the direction parameter P7 3 1 2 or switch the phases of motor cables if necessary Do not run if encoder speed is wrong Program the no load current to ID612 and set ID619 Slip Adjust to get the voltage slightly above the linear V Hz curve with the motor frequency at about 66 of the nominal motor frequency The Motor Nominal Speed parameter ID112 is critical The Current Limit parameter ID107 controls the available torque linearly in relative to motor nominal current Advanced Open Loop Parameters ID622 to ID625 ID632 ID635 Select the Advanced Open Loop control mode by setting value 5 or 6 for parameter ID600 The Advanced Open Loop control mode finds similar implementations as the Closed Loop control mode above However the control accuracy of the Closed Loop control mode is higher than that of the Advanced Open Loop control mode Example Motor Control Mode 5 Frequency control Advanced open loop and 6 Speed control Advanced open loop The motor is running at current vector control at low frequencies At frequencies above the frequency limit the motor is in frequency control The default current value is 12096 at zero frequency Use linear V Hz curve ID108 12096 starting torque should now be possible Sometimes increasing the frequency limit ID635 will improve the run The Frequency limit is the critical point Increase the zero frequency point to get enough current at frequency
167. ogic Selection ID300 0 1 or 2 b Start Stop Logic Selection ID300 3 354 Frequency converter 34567 P1 3 20 P1 3 4 11 P1 3 2 11 temperature limit supervision 0 No supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision If the temperature of the frequency converter unit falls below or exceeds the set limit ID355 this function generates a warning message via the digital output DOT or via a relay output RO1 or RO2 depending on 1 the settings of ID312 to ID314 Applications 3 4 5 or 2 to which output the supervision signal ID451 is connected Applications 6 and 7 355 Frequency converter 34567 7 3 21 P 3 44 12 FP 125 212 temperature limit value This temperature value is supervised by ID354 356 On Off control signal 6 P1 3 4 13 With this parameter you can select the analog input to be monitored 0 Not used 1 Alt 2 Al2 3 Al3 4 Al4 8 30 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 357 358 359 360 361 362 On Off control low limit 6 P1 3 4 14 On Off control high limit 6 P1 3 4 15 These parameters set the low and high limits of the signal selected with ID356 See Figure 8 25 Analog Input Selected with ID356 In this example the programming of ID463 B 1 Figure 8 25 An Example of On Off Control PID controller minimum limit 5 P1 2 30 PID controller maximum limit 5 P1
168. ohibit frequency area e Programmable U f curve and switching frequency e Autorestart e Motor thermal and stall protection Programmable action off warning fault The parameters of the Multi Step Speed Control Application are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual The explanations are arranged according to the individual ID number of the parameter For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 4 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Control I O Table 4 1 Multi Step Speed Control Application Default I O Configuration TOK Terminal Signal Description OPTA1 Reference output Voltage for potentiometer etc Basic reference programmable 0 10V DC range 0 10V DC enn 3 A foron Ground or reference and contre oen 4 Al2 Analog input current range Basic reference programmable 0 20 mA range 0 20 mA re fF Start forward programmable Contact closed start forward i Start reverse programmable External fault input Contact open no fault programmable Contact closed fault Common for DIN1 DIN3 Connect to GND or 24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches see terminal 6 18 I O ground Ground for reference and controls n DIN4 Multi step speed select 1 Sel1 Sel2 Sel3 Sel4 with DIN3 Basic speed DIN5 Multi step speed select 2 Speed 1 Speed 2 16 DIN6 Multi step speed select 3 u nase 15 17 CMB Common fo
169. ole motor and a nominal size frequency converter Check the rating plate of the motor Check the rating plate of the motor 1 I O Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 1 I O Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 0 Al1 1 Al2 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 0 Al1 1 Al2 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus LN Speeds preset by operator MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Input Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 2 Table 2 4 Input Signals G1 2 o INK INK eee INN S 1 P1 2 1 Start Stop logic DINI DN2 Start fwd Start rvs Start Stop Rvs Fwd Start Stop Run enable Start pulse Stop pulse Fwd 9 Rvs 9 Start 9 Stop Rvs Fwd Start 9 Stop Run enable P1 2 2 DIN3 function Te Ext fault closing cont 2 Ext fault opening cont 3 Run enable 4 Acc Dec time select 5 Force CP to Local 6 Force CP to Remote 7 Rvs if par 1 2 1 3 P1 2 3 Current reference ee ie 0 ma SS i offset ie 4 ma SS i P1 2 4 Reference scaling Dr cur 1 2 5 Selects the frequency that minimum value corresponds to the min reference signal 0 00 No scaling P1 2 5 Reference scaling 320 00 Selects the frequency that maximum value corresponds to the max reference signal 0 00 No scaling P1 2 6 Reference inversion TT LT 0 Not inverted Oa Inverted P1 2 7 Reference filter time ou L 10 00 pea ELM O Nofitering ur 2 89 Al1 signal selection ILI
170. olled with DIN5 TRUE increase and DIN6 TRUE decrease Al1 or Al2 whichever is greater Max frequency recommended in torque control Al1 or Al2 whichever is lower Al1 Al2 selection 0 FB Speed Reference 176 Force local 6 P1 2 7 19 Forces control place to I O terminal 177 Force remote 6 P1 2 7 20 Forces control place to keypad 8 10 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 300 Start Stop logic selection 2346 P1 2 1 P1 2 1 1 0 DIN1 closed contact start forward DIN2 closed contact start reverse FWD Output Frequency Stop Function ID506 Coasting Figure 8 6 Start Forward Start Reverse The first selected direction has the highest priority When the DIN1 contact opens the direction of rotation starts to change If Start forward DIN1 and Start reverse DIN2 signals are active simultaneously the Start forward signal DIN1 has priority ODO 1 DIN1 closed contact start open contact stop DIN2 closed contact reverse open contact forward see Figure 8 7 Output Stop Function Frequency ID506 Coasting Figure 8 7 Start Stop and Reverse MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 11 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 2 DIN1 closed contact start open contact stop DIN2 closed contact start enabled open cont
171. ometer reference e pmo m Mot pot reference increases cc 9 P1 2 7 11 9 External fault close Oa Ext fault displayed cc 9 P1 2 7 12 2 7 12 9 External External fault open External fault open 406 Ext fault Ext fault displayed oc Ext fault displayed oc LI 2 7 13 Acc Dec time selection 1 LEE Acc Dec time 1 oc 9 Acc Dec time 2 cc 9 cc closing contact oc opening contact MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 13 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 6 10 Digital Input Signals G1 2 7 Continued Code Parameter min Dtm Jum D Note OOOO noe Fr umm P 27 150 2 7 15 2 DC braking DC braking 0 31 416 416 DC DC braking active cc active DC braking active cc ur 2 7 16 9 Jogging speed 1 9 4 413 Jogging speed selected for frequency reference P1 2 7 17 2 2 176 All Al2seletion selection ae a 422 cc P1 2 7 19 2 7 19 Force remote remote 01 07 Force control place to keypad cc 9 AA i set 1 set 2 selection ee Closed cont Set 2 is used Open cont Set 1 is used P1 2 7 212 Motor control mode 1 2 0 1 164 Closed cont Mode 2 is used Open cont Mode 1 is used See par 1 6 1 1 6 12 cc closing contact oc opening contact 6 14 For more information visit www Ea
172. on generates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 or RO2 depending on 1 the settings of ID312 to ID314 Applications 3 4 5 or 2 to which output the supervision signal ID451 is connected Applications 6 and 7 The supervised reference is the current active reference It can be place A or B reference depending on DIN6 input or panel reference if the panel is the active control place 351 Reference limit supervision 34567 P13 17 P1 3 4 8 P1 3 2 8 value The frequency value to be supervised by ID350 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 29 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 352 External brake off delay 34567 P1 3 18 P1 3 4 9 P1 3 2 9 353 External brake on delay 34567 P1 3 19 P1 3 4 10 P1 3 2 10 The function of the external brake can be timed to the start and stop control signals with these parameters See Figure 8 24 and Page A 1 The brake control signal can be programmed via digital output DO1 or via one of the relay outputs RO1 and RO2 see ID312 to ID314 Applications 3 4 5 or ID445 Applications 6 and 7 a b t ID352 toy ID353 to ID352 ta ID353 nis External 9 External BRAKE OFF DO1RO1 BRAKE OFF DO1 RO1 ON RO2 ON RO2 DIN1 RUN FWD DIN1 START STOP PULSE ae d DINZ STOP Lu PULSE t Figure 8 24 External Brake Control a Start Stop L
173. on See Page 6 3 Al1 signal range 320 0 0 100 1 20 100 9 2 Custom setting range Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 CP control place cc closing contact oc opening contact MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 4 5 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 4 4 Input Signals G1 2 Continued Code Parameter Mim Mex Unit Default Gust b P1 2 5 Al1 custom setting 100 00 321 Analog input 1 scale minimum minimum P1 2 6 Al1 custom setting 100 00 100 0 322 Analog input 1 scale maximum maximum P1 2 7 Al signal 1 323 Analog input 1 reference Inversion Inversion yes no P1 2 8 Al1 signal filter 324 Analog input 1 reference filter time time constant P1 2 99 Al2 signal 388 TTF programming method used selection See Page 6 3 P1 2 10 AI2 signal range P1 2 11 Al2 custom setting minimum P1 2 12 Al2 custom setting maximum P1 2 13 AI2 signal inversion P1 2 14 AI2 signal filter time P1 2 15 Reference scaling minimum value 10 00 0 10 2 1 4 20 mA 2 custom setting range Win Analog input 2 scale minimum M 327 Analog input 2 scale maximum 328 Analog input 2 reference Inversion yes no 0 10 329 Analog input 2 reference filter time constant 100 00 100 00 1 10 00 Par 1 2 16 Hz 303 Selects the frequency that correspon
174. onnected to the Master SPX only The Master controls the Follower s via a SystemBus The Master station is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow its torque or speed reference Torque control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and Follower drives are coupled solidly to each other by gearing a chain etc so that no speed difference between the drives is possible Speed control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and the Follower drives are coupled flexibly to each other so that a slight speed difference between the drives is possible When both the Master and the Followers are speed controlled drooping is typically also used Master Follower Link Physical Connections The master drive is located on the left side and all others are followers The master follower physical link can be built with OPT D1 or OPT D2 option boards Optical Fibre Connection Between Frequency Converters with OPT D1 connect the output 1 of Device 1 to the input 2 of Device 2 and the input of Device 1 to the output 2 of Device 2 Note that in the end devices one terminal pair remains unused Optical Fibre Connection Between Frequency Converters with OPT D2 In this connection example the leftmost device is the Master and the others are followers The OPT D2 board in the Master has the default jumper selections i e X6 1 2 X5 1 2 For the followers the jumper positions have to be changed X6 1
175. ons see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 Jumper Block X3 CMA and CMB Grounding ee CMB connected to GND e CMA connected to GND ele CMB isolated from GND e CMA isolated from GND ele CMB and CMA internally connected together isolated from GND Factory default 3 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Local Remote Control Application Parameter Lists On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter groups The parameter descriptions are given in Chapter 8 Column explanations Code Location indication on the keypad Shows the operator the present parameter number Parameter Name of parameter Min Minimum value of parameter Max Maximum value of parameter Unit Unit of parameter value Given if available Default Value preset by factory Cust Customer s own setting ID D number of the parameter Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has been stopped Use TTF method to program these parameters See Page 6 3 Monitoring Values Control Keypad Menu M7 The monitoring values are the actual values of parameters and signals as well as statuses and measurements Monitoring values cannot be edited See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 for more information Output frequency to motor Table 3 2 Monitoring Values az
176. ons of these The direct frequency reference can be used for the control without the PID controller and selected from the analog inputs fieldbus motor potentiometer or keypad The PID Application is typically used to control level measuring or pumps and fans In these applications the PID Application provides a smooth control and an integrated measuring and controlling package where no additional components are needed e Digital inputs DIN2 DIN3 DIN5 and all the outputs are freely programmable Additional functions Analog input signal range selection Two frequency limit supervisions Torque limit supervision Reference limit supervision Second ramps and S shape ramp programming Programmable start and stop functions DC brake at start and stop Three prohibit frequency areas Programmable U f curve and switching frequency Autorestart Motor thermal and stall protection fully programmable off warning fault Motor underload protection Input and output phase supervision Sum point frequency addition to PID output The PID controller can additionally be used from control places I O B keypad and fieldbus Easy ChangeOver function e Sleep function The parameters of the PID Control Application are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual The explanations are arranged according to the individual ID number of the parameter MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 200
177. ontroller switched off 1 Controller switched on Torque limit 6 P1 10 1 With this parameter you can set the torque limit control between 0 0 400 0 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 Torque limit control P gain 6 P 1 19 2 This parameter defines the gain of the torque limit controller Torque limit control I gain 6 P1 10 3 This parameter determines the l gain of the torque limit controller CL Magnetizing current 234567 P1 6 12 1 P1 6 15 1 Sets the motor magnetizing current no load current See Page A 3 CL Speed control P gain 234567 P1 6 12 2 P1 6 15 2 Sets the gain for the speed controller in per Hz See Page A 3 CL Speed control l time 234567 P1 6 12 3 P1 6 15 3 Sets the integral time constant for the speed controller Increasing the I time increases stability but lengthens the speed response time See Page A 3 CL Zero speed time at start 234567 P1 6 12 9 P1 6 15 9 After giving the start command the drive will remain at zero speed for the time defined by this parameter The ramp will be released to follow the set frequency speed reference after this time has elapsed from the instant where the command is given See Page A 3 CL Zero speed time at stop 234567 P1 6 12 10 P1 6 15 10 The drive will remain at z
178. oring values cannot be edited See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 for more information Note that the monitoring values V1 19 to V1 22 are available with the PID control application only Table 5 2 Monitoring Values Output frequency Frequency reference Motor speed IL N Output frequency to motor Frequency reference to motor control Motor speed in rpm In 96 of Motor nom torque Motor shaft power Heatsink temperature Calculated motor temperature IL N Pis NO 5 Motor current Motor torque Motor power Motor voltage DC Bus voltage Unit temperature Motor temperature Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 Analog input 4 DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 oS aS Oo as 1 gt I NO N N O1 CO N CO N CO 15 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 3 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 5 2 Monitoring Values Continued V1 16 DIN4 DIN5 DIN6 V1 17 DO1 RO1 RO2 V1 18 V1 19 In 96 of the max frequency V1 20 PID Actual value 96 21 In of the max actual value V1 21 PID Error value In of the max error value V1 22 PID Output In of the max output value V1 23 PT 100 Temperature a Highest temperature of used inputs G1 24 Monitoring items pf Displays three selectable monitoring values Basic Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 1 Table 5 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Code Parameter Mim Max U
179. ot in use delay MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 15 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Digital Output Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 3 3 Table 6 13 Digital Output Signals G1 3 3 Code Parameter Mm Default Cust ID Nowe Piast Ready OAT e Readytorun P332 en OB G9 Running PI333 fam 82 4 brivent Prass Waning o n 435 Wamningactive PI336 Exemalfaut o fon 43 _ Externalfaultectve Praag Reverse fo 01 40 Outputtrequency lt OH2 PL3310 Unrequesteddiecion o 01 aa Reference lt gt Output frequency Jogging speed EAE P1 3 3 12 443 Jogging or preset speed command active P1 3 3 14 External brake control o O01 45 See explanations on Page P1 3 3 15 External brake control inverted o 01 446 See explanations on Page P1 3 3 16 Output frequency limit 1 0 1 447 SeelD315 supervision P1 3 3 17 Output frequency limit 2 0 1 448 SeelD346 supervision P1 3 3 18 Reference limit supervision o 01 P3319 Temperature limit supervision 0 01 aso semsa P13320 Torquelimit supervision o for 4 sems P133219 Motorthermal protection fo for a2 fo P1 3322 Analog input supervision imit 0 01 ass sems P13323 Motorregulator activation o0 03 pa P133248 Fieldbusinputdatat 0 on fass FBCWBn PISS25 HeMbusimutda2 o fon
180. pem LL Lu 2 High limit P1 3 15 Torque limit 200 0 100 0 o pnm supervision value P1 3 16 Reference limit 350 0 No supervision function 1 Low limit TES DILE 2 High limit P1 3 17 Reference limit 100 0 Lm supervision value P1 3 18 External brake Off 100 0 dE a delay 3 19 External brake On adil oul 0 Ii LM B delay unl 3 20 Frequency converter E 0 No temperature limit 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit d 3 21 Frequency converter p Mad pe limit Value P1 3 22 Analog output 2 signal LL 1 IE programming method used selection See Page 6 3 P1 3 23 Analog output 2 472 Same as parameter 1 3 2 function P1 3 24 Analog output 2 filter 10 00 1 00 473 0 No filtering time P1 3 2 5 Analog output 2 1 474 0 Not inverted inversion 1 Inverted P1 3 26 Analog output 2 1 475 0 OmA minimum 1 4mA P327 Analog output scaling 10 1000 io W6 4 8 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Drive Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 4 Table 4 6 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 m MM IN NET MENOM C P1 4 1 Ramp 1 shape 500 0 Linear gt 0 S curve ramp time P1 4 2 Ramp 2 shape 501 0 Linear gt 0 S curve time P143 4 3 Acceleration ur 2 0 1 3000 0 Ols 10 0 0 502 Praa Deccleration time for 30008 s 109 889
181. ponse to undervoltage fault 234567 P1 7 5 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting For the undervoltage limits see SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Table 4 2 728 4 mA reference fault preset 234567 J P1 7 2 frequency reference If the value of parameter ID700 is set to 3 and the 4 mA fault occurs then the frequency reference to the motor is the value of this parameter 730 Input phase supervision 234567 P1 7 4 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID506 3 Fault stop mode after fault always by coasting The input phase supervision ensures that the input phases of the frequency converter have approximately equal currents 731 Automatic restart 1 P1 20 The Automatic restart is used when this parameter is enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The function resets the following faults max three times see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Appendix B Overcurrent F1 Overvoltage F2 Undervoltage F9 e Frequency converter overtemperature F14 Motor overtemperature F16 Reference fault F50 8 70 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 732 733 734 738 739 740 741 742 MN04004001E Response to thermistor fault 234567 P1 7 21 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop mode after fault according to ID5
182. poration is a diversified industrial manufacturer with 2004 sales of 9 8 billion Eaton is a global leader in electrical systems and components for power quality distribution and control fluid power systems and services for industrial mobile and aircraft equipment intelligent truck drivetrain systems for safety and fuel economy and automotive engine air management systems powertrain solutions and specialty controls for performance fuel economy and safety Eaton has 56 000 employees and sells products to customers in more than 125 countries For more information visit www eaton com Eaton Electrical Inc 1000 Cherrington Parkway Moon Township PA 15108 4312 USA tel 1 800 525 2000 www EatonElectrical com 2005 Eaton Corporation All Rights Reserved A Printed in USA ut S a m m e r Publication No MN04004001E CPG D August 2005
183. pped running 4 Used when running no testing 4 6 function o qe 0 Ramp 1 Flying start m 4 7 hala function LL 0 Coasting 1 Ramp 2 Ramp Run enable coast 3 Coast Run enable ee paana ea a amie e der ur 507 P1 4 9 DC Ee time at ee 00 508 0 ee a ae brake is off at stop Ee P1 4 10 Frequency to start DC 10 inel 00 515 braking during P1 4 11 DC braking time 600 00 ne 0 DC brake is off at start at start P1 4 12 Flux brake 520 0 Off mer fas 1 je m M PIATS Fluxbraking current 04x 2x4 A m B0 Prohibit Frequency Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 5 Table 2 7 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note P1 5 1 Prohibit frequency Par 1 5 2 Hz 509 range 1 low limit P1 5 2 Prohibit frequency 320 00 Hz 510 range 1 high limit PTS Prohibitaec dec ramp 01 100 10 88 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 2 7 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Motor Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 6 Table 2 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 M CMM LN NE OMINMENES M P1 6 1 Motor control mode SVX 0 Frequency control 1 Speed control Additionally for SPX 2 Torque control 3 Closed loop speed ctrl 4 Closed loop torque ctrl 5 Adv open loop freq control 6 Advanced open loop speed control P1 6 2 V Hz
184. q Min ref signal Max set freq 0 No inversion 1 Reference inverted Output Frequency Max Freq ID102 Min Freq ID101 Figure 8 11 Reference Inversion 306 Reference filter time 2 P1 2 7 Filters out disturbances from the incoming analog Vin signal A long filtering time makes regulation response slower Unfiltered Signal Filtered Signal Figure 8 12 Reference Filtering 307 Analog output function IPT 16 F 1 3 2 P1 3 5 2 P 1 3 3 2 This parameter selects the desired function for the analog output signal See the specific parameters for the values available in each respective application 8 16 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 308 Analog output filter time 234567 P1 3 3 P1 3 5 3 P1 3 3 3 Defines the filtering time for the analog output signal Setting this parameter value to 0 00 will deactivate filtering Unfiltered Signal Filtered Signal Figure 8 13 Analog Output Filtering 309 Analog output inversion 234567 P1 3 4 P1 3 5 4 P1 3 3 4 Inverts the analog output signal Maximum output signal Minimum set value Minimum output signal Maximum set value See ID311 in Figure 8 14 Analog Output Current 20 mA ID311 100 Max Value of Signal Selected with ID307 Figure 8 14 Analog Output Invert 310 Analog output minimum 234567 P1 3 5 P1 3 5 5 P1 3 3 5 Defines t
185. r DIN4 DING Connect to GND or 24V Daim Output frequency Programmable Analog output Range 0 20 mA RL max 5002 20 DO1 Digital output Programmable p READY Open collector x 50 mA V 48V DC Relay output 1 Programmable L Relay output 2 Programmable Note For more information on jumper selections see the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 Jumper Block X3 CMA and CMB Grounding ee CMB connected to GND e CMA connected to GND ele CMB isolated from GND e CMA isolated from GND el CMB and CMA internally connected together isolated from GND Factory default 4 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Multi Step Speed Control Application Parameter Lists On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter groups The parameter descriptions are given in Chapter 8 Column explanations Code Location indication on the keypad Shows the operator the present parameter number Parameter Name of parameter Min Minimum value of parameter Max Maximum value of parameter Unit Unit of parameter value Given if available Default Value preset by factory Cust Customer s own setting ID D number of the parameter Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has been stopped Use TTF method to program these parameters See P
186. r more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Drive Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 4 Table 5 6 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 Code Parameter Mim Mex Unit Deth Cust D Note P1 4 1 Ramp 1 shape 10 0 500 0 Linear gt 0 S curve ramp time P1 4 2 Ramp 2 shape 501 0 Linear gt 0 S curve P time a Decnermien mel 0 1 30000 ES a oe 4 50 Brake E eos Disabled 1 Used when running 2 External brake chopper 3 Used when stopped running 4 Used when running no testing 4 6 function n Ramp B Flying start uu 4 7 mund function _ 0 Coasting 1 Ramp 2 Ramp Run enable coast 3 Coast Run enable Ru fees Ra eii e tu fr farmers P1 4 9 DC braking time pee 00 508 0 DC brake is off at stop at stop Frequency to start lul 00 515 DC braking during ramp stop P1 4 11 DC braking time ml 00 m 0 a brake is off at start at start P1 4 12 Flux brake di 0 _ 1 On Prana Flux braking current O4xh 2xtq A w 89 Prohibit Frequency Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 5 Table 5 7 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust D Noe P1 5 1 Prohibit frequency Par 1 5 2 Hz 509 0 Not used range 1 low limit P1 5 2 Prohibit frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz 510 0 Not used range 1 high limit P1 5 3 Prohibit
187. rameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the trial time set by ID718 Note An IGBT temperature fault also included as part of this fault 0 No automatic restart after overcurrent fault trip gt 0 Number of automatic restarts after an overcurrent trip saturation trip or IGBT temperature fault 723 Automatic restart Number of 234567 P1 8 7 tries after reference trip This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the trial time set by ID718 0 No automatic restart after reference fault trip gt 0 Number of automatic restarts after the analog current signal 4 20 mA has returned to the normal level 4 mA 725 Automatic restart Number of 234567 P1 8 9 tries after external fault trip This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the trial time set by ID718 0 No automatic restart after External fault trip gt 0 Number of automatic restarts after External fault trip MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 69 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 726 Automatic restart Number of 234567 P1 8 8 tries after motor temperature fault trip This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the trial time set by ID718 0 No automatic restart after Motor temperature fault trip gt 0 Number of automatic restarts after the motor temperature has returned to its normal level 727 Res
188. rameters of the Basic Application are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual The explanations are arranged according to the individual ID number of the parameter Motor Protection Functions in the Basic Application The Basic Application provides almost all the same protection functions as the other applications External fault protection Input phase supervision Undervoltage protection Output phase supervision Earth fault protection Motor thermal protection Thermistor fault protection Fieldbus fault protection Slot fault protection Unlike the other applications the Basic Application does not provide any parameters for choosing the response function or limit values for the faults The motor thermal protection is explained in more detail on Page A 4 in Appendix A MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 1 1 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Control I O Reference potentiometer Table 1 1 Basic Application Default I O Configuration iiie Terminal Signa Descripton OPTA1 Voltage for potentiometer etc Al1 Analog input voltage range Voltage input frequency reference 0 10V DC I O Ground Ground for reference and controls 4 Al2 Analog input current range Current input frequency reference P r 6 24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches etc max 0 1A 7 GND I O ground Ground for reference and controls 8 DIN1 Startforward 1 Contact
189. rmation visit www EatonElectrical com 101 102 NOTE If OTE Re gt than the motor synchronous speed check suitability for motor and drive system 111 Check the rating plate of the motor P1 1 86 Nominal speed of the 300 20 000 rpm pelli 112 motor 113 Check the rating plate of the motor The default applies for a 4 pole motor and a nominal size frequency converter Nd Check the rating plate of the ud 1 I O Terminal 2 Keypad Fieldbus O Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 0 Al1 1 Al2 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 4 Motor potentiometer 0 Al1 1 Al2 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 4 Motor potentiometer 0 Al1 1 Al2 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Input Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 2 Table 3 4 Input Signals G1 2 P1 2 1 Place A Start Stop logic selection feust tO Ne OO je O Start fwd Start rvs Start Stop Reverse Start Stop Run enable Start pulse Stop pulse Start fwd Mot pot UP Fwd Rvs Start Stop Rvs Fwd Start Stop Run enable Start fwd Mot pot UP o 40 COIR WN 13 301 0 Not used 1 Ext fault closing cont 2 Ext fault opening cont 3 Run enable 4 Acc Dec time select 5 Force CP to Local 9 6 Force CP to Remote 9 7 Rvs if par 1 2 1 3 8 Jogging speed 9 Fault reset 10 Acc Dec operation prohibit 11 D
190. rnal torque value If other than nominal motor is used with the drive the accuracy of the torque calculation decreases Fieldbus Control Parameters ID850 to ID859 MN04004001E The Fieldbus control parameters are used when the frequency or the speed reference comes from the fieldbus Modbus Profibus DeviceNet etc With the Fieldbus Data Out Selection 1 8 you can monitor values from the fieldbus For more information visit www EatonElectrical com A 5 SPX9000 AF Drives For more information visit www EatonElectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com A 7 SPX9000 AF Drives For more information visit www EatonElectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 MN04004001E Company Information Eaton s electrical business is a global leader in electrical control power distribution and industrial automation products and services Through advanced product development world class manufacturing methods and global engineering services and support Eaton s electrical business provides customer driven solutions under brand names such as Cutler Hammer Powerware Durant Heinemann Holec and MEMS which globally serve the changing needs of the industrial utility light commercial residential and OEM markets For more information visit www EatonElectrical com Eaton Cor
191. rol with better performance at lower speeds 6 Speed control advanced open loop Speed control with better performance at lower speeds 601 Switching frequency 234567 P1 6 9 Motor noise can be minimized using a high switching frequency Increasing the switching frequency reduces the capacity of the frequency converter unit The range of this parameter depends on the size of the frequency converter Table 8 12 Size Dependent Switching Frequencies Type Min kHz Mex kHz Default kHz 0003 0061 SPX 5 1 0 0003 0061 SPX 2 0072 0520 SPX 5 10 0 0041 0062 SPX 6 0144 0208 SPX 6 602 Field weakening point 234567 P1 6 4 The field weakening point is the output frequency at which the output voltage reaches the set ID603 maximum value MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 57 SPX9000 AF Drives 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 8 58 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Voltage at field weakening 234567 P1 6 5 point Above the frequency at the field weakening point the output voltage remains at the set maximum value Below the frequency at the field weakening point the output voltage depends on the setting of the V Hz curve parameters See ID109 ID108 ID604 and ID605 When the parameters ID110 and ID111 nominal voltage and nominal frequency of the motor are set the parameters ID602 and ID603 are automatically set to the corresponding valu
192. rrent injected into the motor during DC braking DC braking time at stop 234567 P1 4 9 Determines if braking is ON or OFF and the braking time of the DC brake when the motor is stopping The function of the DC brake depends on the stop function ID506 0 0 DC brake is not used gt 0 0 DC brake is in use and its function depends on the Stop function ID506 The DC braking time is determined with this parameter Par ID506 z 0 Stop function z Coasting After the stop command the motor coasts to a stop without control of the frequency converter With DC injection the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possible time without using an optional external braking resistor The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC braking starts If the frequency is 2 the nominal frequency of the motor the set value of parameter ID508 determines the braking time When the frequency is lt 10 of the nominal the braking time is 1096 of the set value of ID508 Output Frequency a Motor Speed DC Braking ON t 0 1 x ID508 Figure 8 43 DC Braking Time when Stop Mode Coasting For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 53 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Par ID506 z 1 Stop function z Ramp After the Stop command the speed of the motor is reduced according to the set deceleration parameters as fast as possible to the speed defined with ID515 where the DC braking
193. ry Drive 8 74 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 1012 Reference step after start of 7 P1 9 12 auxiliary drive 1 1013 Reference step after start of 7 P1 9 13 auxiliary drive 2 1014 Reference step after start of 7 P1 9 14 auxiliary drive 3 1015 Reference step after start of 7 P1 9 15 auxiliary drive 4 The reference step will always be automatically added to the reference value when the corresponding auxiliary drive is started With the reference steps e g the pressure loss in the piping caused by the inceased flow can be compensated See Figure 8 55 Reference for Pl Controller Reference Step 3 ID1014 Reference Step 2 3 ID1013 Reference Step 1 N ID1012 N Reference Analog Input Start Aux Drive 1 Stop Start Aux Drive 2 ss usSop O LL LU Start Aux Drive 3 LLL g swb Lo LLL LU Figure 8 55 Reference Steps after Starting Auxiliary Drives 1016 Sleep frequency 57 P1 1 15 The frequency converter is automatically stopped if the frequency of the drive falls below the Sleep level defined with this parameter for a time greater than that determined by ID1017 During the Stop state the PID controller is operating switching the frequency converter back to the Run state when the actual value signal either falls below or exceeds ID1019 the Wake up level determined by ID1018 See Figure
194. ry drives 7 P1 9 1 With this parameter the number of auxiliary drives in use will be defined The functions controlling the auxiliary drives ID458 to ID462 can be programmed to relay outputs or digital output By default one auxiliary drive is in use and itis programmed to relay output RO1 at B 1 Start frequency auxiliary 7 P1 9 2 drive 1 The frequency of the drive controlled by the frequency converter must exceed the limit defined with these parameters with 1 Hz before the auxiliary drive is started The 1 Hz overdraft makes a hysteresis to avoid unnecessary starts and stops See Figure 8 54 See also ID101 and ID102 Stop frequency auxiliary 7 P1 9 3 drive 1 The frequency of the drive controlled by the frequency converter must fall with 1 Hz below the limit defined with these parameters before the auxiliary drive is stopped The stop frequency limit also defines the frequency to which the frequency of the drive controlled by the frequency converter is dropped after starting the auxiliary drive See Figure 8 54 Start frequency auxiliary 7 P1 9 4 drive 2 Stop frequency auxiliary 7 P1 9 5 drive 2 Start frequency auxiliary 7 P1 9 6 drive 3 Stop frequency auxiliary 7 P1 9 7 drive 3 Start frequency auxiliary 7 P1 9 8 drive 4 Stop frequency auxiliary 7 P1 9 9 drive 4 See ID1002 and ID1003 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 73 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005
195. s 6 4 Figure 6 4 System Bus Physical Connections with the OPT D2 Board 6 5 Figure 6 5 System Bus Physical Connections with the OPT D1 Board 6 6 Figure 7 1 2 Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram 7 3 Figure 7 2 3 Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram 7 4 Figure 7 3 Example of the Function of the PFC Application with Three AUG DEVES 4 2545 Ixus tae a3 been bee baees sees eos tees REN dud a os 7 8 Figure 7 4 Example of 2 Pump Autochange Main Diagram Ls 7 9 Figure 7 5 Example of 3 Pump Autochange Main Diagram Ls 7 9 Figure 8 1 Linear and Squared Change of Motor Voltage 0000 cee eee 8 2 Figure 8 2 Programmable V Hz Curve i sx oRE fen Re ic GEEG PES bei we deed 8 3 Figure 8 3 PID Controller Function as l Controller 0 0 00 e eee eee 8 6 Figure 8 4 PID Output Curve with the Values of Example 2 8 6 Figure 8 5 PID Output Curve with the Values of Example 3 8 7 Figure 8 6 Start Forward Start Reverse 0 00 cee eee eee 8 11 Figure 8 7 Start Stop and Reverse 2 0 00 cee eee eee eens 8 11 Figure 9 9 Start Pulse Stop Pulse 13252 993b REESE hee 9 0 909 9 303035 9 8 8 63 9 kde 8 12 Figure 8 9 DIN3 as DC Brake Command Input 0 0 00 0c cee eee 8 15 Figure 8 10 With and Without Reference Scaling nanana cece eee eee 8 15 Figure 8
196. s appear as parameters which the operator defines a certain input output See Caution on Page 6 4 Defining an Input Output for a Certain Function on Keypad Connecting a certain input or output with a certain function parameter is done by giving the parameter an appropriate value The value is formed of the Board slot on the SVX control board see SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 and the respective signal number as shown in Figure 6 1 Function Name P133 1 aD Al Ref Faul Warn DigOUT B 1 E Terminal Type Terminal Number Figure 6 1 Defining Input Output Function Example You want to connect the digital output function Reference fault warning P1 3 3 7 to the digital output DO1 on the basic board OPTA1 see SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 First find the P1 3 3 7 on the keypad Press the Menu button right once to enter the edit mode On the value line you will see the terminal type on the left DigIN DigOUT An IN An OUT and on the right the present input output the function is connected to B 3 A 2 etc or if not connected a value 0 2 When the value is blinking hold down the Browser button up or down to find the desired board slot and signal number The program will scroll the board slots starting from 0 and proceeding from A to E and the I O selection from 1 to 10 Once you have set the desired value press the Enter button once to confirm the change See Figure 6 2 PL331 MED P331 CD P3
197. s digital DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 456 input 2 P1 3 1 26 Fieldbus digital DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 457 input 3 P1 3 1 27 Autochange 1 DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT B 1 458 Aux 1 control P1 3 1 28 Autochange 2 DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT B 2 459 Aux 2 control P1 3 1 29 Autochange 3 DIigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 Aux 3 control P1 3 1 30 Autochange 4 DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 DigOUT 0 1 461 Aux 4 control P1 3 1 31 Autochange 5 DigOUT 0 1 DigOUT E 10 EN DigOUT 0 1 4682 Limit Settings Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 2 Table 7 11 Output Signals Limit Settings G1 3 2 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust D We 5 P1 3 2 1 Output frequency 2 315 0 No limit limit 1 supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision P1 3 2 2 Output freq limit 1 P1 1 2 Hz 316 Supervised value SCA Output frequency 2 346 0 No limit limit 2 supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision P1 3 2 4 Output freq limit 2 P1 1 2 Hz 347 Supervised value 23 2 Torque limit 2 348 0 Not used supervision 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision P1 3 2 6 Torque limit 300 0 100 0 349 supervision value P1 3 2 7 Reference limit 350 0 Not used supervision 1 Low limit 2 High limit P1 3 2 8 Reference limit 100 0 ul supervision value P1 3 2 9 External 100 0 a brake off delay P1 3 2 11 FC
198. s needed and PID control is not necessary if you need PID control functions use PID control Application or Pump and Fan Control Application The frequency reference can be selected e g from the analog inputs joystick control motor potentiometer and from a mathematical function of the analog inputs There are parameters also for Fieldbus communication Multi step speeds and jogging speed can also be selected if digital inputs are programmed for these functions e The digital inputs and all the outputs are freely programmable and the application supports all l O boards Additional functions Analog input signal range selection Two frequency limit supervisions Torque limit supervision Reference limit supervision Second ramps and S shape ramp programming Programmable Start Stop and Reverse logic DC brake at start and stop Three prohibit frequency areas Programmable U f curve and switching frequency Autorestart Motor thermal and stall protection fully programmable off warning fault Motor underload protection Input and output phase supervision Joystick hysteresis Sleep function Power limit functions Different power limits for motoring and generating side Master Follower function Different torque limits for motoring and generating side Cooling monitor input from heat exchange unit Brake monitoring input and actual current monitor for immediate brake close Separate speed control tuning for different speeds and loads
199. sition 54 From OPTBB board V1 23 8 Absolute encod rotations 55 From OPTBB board V1 24 1 FB limit scaling 9 amp 46 Default control of FB PD 2 V1 24 2 Default control of FB PD 3 V1 24 3 FB analog output 6 48 Default control of FB PD 4 V1 24 5 Motor current to FB A 45 Motor current drive independent given with one decimal point Basic Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 1 Table 6 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cus ID ote P1 1 1 Min frequency Par 1 1 2 J Min frequency 0 00 Par 1 1 2 Hz 0 00 10 P1 1 2 Max frequency Par 1 1 1 320 00 Hz 60 00 102 NOTE If fmax gt than the motor synchronous speed check suitability for motor and drive system 30 8mes s 5 ws FI14 Decelerationtime 101 S700 s 30 pa FILS Currentiimt fo 2xm Ak Nominal voltage of 180 V 110 the motor SPX 690V P1 1 7 Nominal frequency 8 00 320 00 Hz 60 00 111 Check the rating plate of the of the motor motor Nominal speed of 24 20 000 rpm 1440 112 The default applies for a 4 pole the motor motor and a nominal size frequency converter P1 1 9 Nominal current of O 1xl 2xly A lu 113 Check the rating plate of the the motor motor 6 8 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 6 3 Basic Parameters
200. sleep delay 6 P1 2 2 10 This parameter defines the time the analog input signal has to stay under the Sleep limit determined with parameter ID385 in order to stop the frequency converter 388 Al2 signal selection 234567 P1 2 9 P1 2 21 P1 2 3 1 Connect the Al2 signal to the analog input of your choice with this parameter For more information about the TTF programming method see Page 6 3 8 40 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 393 394 395 396 397 399 400 MN04004001E Al2 reference scaling minimum value Al2 reference scaling maximum value See ID303 and ID304 Al2 joystick hysteresis See ID384 Al2 sleep limit See ID385 Al2 sleep delay See ID386 Scaling of current limit 0 Not used 1 Alt 2 Al2 3 Al3 4 Al4 5 SPX9000 AF Drives P1 2 3 6 P1 2 3 7 P1 2 3 8 P1 2 3 9 P1 2 3 10 P1 2 6 1 Fieldbus FBProcessDatalN2 This signal will adjust the maximum motor current between 0 and max limit set with ID107 Scaling of DC braking current See ID399 for the selections P1 2 6 2 DC braking current can be reduced with the free analog input signal between current 0 4 x lu and the current set with ID507 See Figure 8 37 Free Analog Input Signal Range Figure 8 37 Scaling of DC Braking Current For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 41 SPX9000 AF Drives E
201. sure equipment is properly grounded Wear safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or rotating machinery For more information visit www EatonElectrical com August 2005 MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Cautions and Notices Read this manual thoroughly and make sure you understand the procedures before you attempt to install set up or operate this Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives from Eaton s electrical business Cautions A CAUTION Be ABSOLUTELY sure not to connect two functions to one and same output in order to avoid function overruns and to ensure flawless operation A CAUTION The calculated model does not protect the motor if the airflow to the motor is reduced by blocked air intake grill Notices Notice The inputs unlike the outputs cannot be changed in RUN state MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 x For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 eee Chapter 1 Basic Application SVCHST01 Introduction The Basic Application is easy and flexible to use due to its versatile fieldbus features It is the default setting on delivery from the factory Otherwise select the Basic Application in menu M5 See Chapter 5 of the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Digital input DIN3 is programmable The pa
202. t Unit of parameter value Given if available Default Value preset by factory Cust User s customized setting ID D number of the parameter for reference to Chapter 8 Parameter value can only be changed when the drive is stopped Programmed using terminal to function TTF method See Page 6 3 Monitoring Values Control Keypad Menu M68 The monitoring values are the actual values of parameters and signals as well as statuses and measurements Monitoring values cannot be edited See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 5 for more information Table 6 2 Monitoring Values SPX Drives Output frequency Output frequency to motor Frequency reference to motor control Frequency reference Motor speed in rpm BEES A 3 V v p Vis Usnempesurs F 19 Oo O Oo V mA 11 2 O1 I3 l4 V mA V1 15 Analog output 1 V mA V1 17 Analog input 4 V mA PT 100 temperature C Highest temperature of used PT100 Inputs MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 7 Hz Hz rpm Jo Jo C Jo Jo 1 2b 2 5 13 14 15 16 26 27 28 18 42 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 6 2 Monitoring Values SPX Drives Continued V1 20 Analog output 2 AO2 V1 21 Analog output 3 AO3 G1 22 Multimonitoring items NEM Displays three selectable monitoring NE values V1 23 1 V 44 Unfiltered DC link voltage V1 23 6 From OPTA7 board V1 23 7 Absolute encoder po
203. t 2005 List of Tables continued Table 3 1 Local Remote Application Default I O Configuration LL 3 2 Table 3 2 Monitoring V alueS sua 9b R3 ESERDLAXG DRERERAYU S nERESESI ER RES 3 3 Table 3 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 l c nn 3 4 Table 3 4 Input Signals G T2 iu 2 aciem B oe eR Pus Co See Se doce nx mc Ee b Ee 3 5 Table 3 5 Output Signals G1 3 clle rn 3 7 Table 3 6 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 llle es 3 9 Table 3 7 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 leeren 3 10 Table 3 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 eee ee ees 3 10 Table 3 9 Protections OQ T1 7 iia ARR en Rupe RO Red EG nme Sas 264 ado a donne 3 12 Table 3 10 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 leere 3 13 Table 3 11 Keypad Control Parameters M2 eeeee nn 3 14 Table 4 1 Multi Step Speed Control Application Default I O Configuration 4 2 Table 4 2 Monitoring Values lelleeeeeeeeerr hh hn 4 3 Table 4 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 0 cc mnn 4 4 Table 4 4 Input Signals G1 2 2 0 0 rh hh 4 5 Table 4 5 Output Signals G1 3 ee hrs 4 7 Table 4 6 Drive Control Parameters G1 4 leleeee nnn 4 9 Table 4 7 Prohibit Frequency Parameters G1 5 0000 cece eee ees 4 9 Table 4 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 0 02 cee eee ees 4 10 Table 4 9 Protections G1
204. t closed PID controller keypad reference 2 selected with paameter R3 5 Motor potentiometer ramp 3567 P1 2 22 P1 2 27 P 52 ade P1 2 1 15 time Defines the speed of change of the motor potentiometer value PID controller reference signal 57 P1 1 11 Place A Defines which frequency reference place is selected for the PID controller Table 8 11 Selections for ID332 Select eo Select Al1 terminals 2 3 Al1 terminals 2 3 Al2 terminals 4 5 Al2 terminals 4 5 PID ref from menu M2 Al3 parameter R34 Fieldbus reference Al4 FBProcessDatalN 1 Motor potentiometer PID ref from menu M2 reference parameter R34 Fieldbus reference FBProcessDatalN1 Motor potentiometer reference For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 25 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 333 PID controller actual value 57 P1 2 8 P1 2 1 8 selection This parameter selects the PID controller actual value 0 Actual value 1 1 Actual value 1 Actual value 2 2 Actual value 1 Actual value 2 3 Actual value 1 Actual value 2 4 Greater one of Actual value 1 and Actual value 2 5 Smaller one of Actual value 1 and Actual value 2 6 Mean value of Actual value 1 and Actual value 2 7 Square root of Actual value 1 Square root of Actual value 2 334 Actual value 1 selection 57 P1 2 9 P1 2 1 9 335 Actual value 2 selection 57 P1 2 10 P1 2 1 10 0 Not used 1 Al1 control board 2 Al2 control board
205. t frequency Par 1 5 4 Hz 511 0 Not used range 2 low limit P1 5 4 Prohibit frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz 512 0 Not used range 2 high limit P1 5 5 Prohibit frequency Par 1 5 6 Hz 513 0 Not used range 3 low limit P1 5 6 Prohibit frequency Par 1 1 2 Hz 514 0 Not used range 3 high limit P1 5 7 Prohibit acc dec 0 1 10 0 Times 1 0 518 ramp Motor Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 6 Table 6 20 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 o Ow es P1 6 1 Motor control SVX mode 0 Frequency control 1 Speed control 2 Torque control Additionally for SPX 3 Closed loop speed ctrl 4 Closed loop torque ctrl 5 Adv open loop freq control 6 Advanced open loop speed control P1 6 2 V Hz optimization 109 0 Not used 1 Automatic torque boost P1 6 3 V Hz ratio 108 0 Linear selection 1 Squared 2 Programmable 3 Linear with flux optim P1 6 49 Field weakening 60 00 lal point P1 6 5 Voltage at field 10 00 200 00 weakening point P1 6 6 V Hz curve par 1 6 4 midpoint frequency P1 6 7 V Hz curve 100 00 midpoint voltage P1 6 8 QOutput voltage at 40 00 zero frequency 320 00 100 00 ad n96 X Unmot B BUE 100 00 noo X Uso Parameter max value par 1 6 5 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 6 21 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 6 20 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Continued CL G
206. t function 719 0 Ramp 1 Flying start 2 According to par 1 4 6 P1 8 4 Number of tries after m undervoltage trip P1 8 5 Number of tries after ud overvoltage trip P1 8 6 Number of tries after 722 overcurrent trip ind 8 7 Number of tries after ind trip P1 8 8 Number of tries after motor temperature fault trip P1 ndi 9 Number of tries after 725 en ee fault trip P1 8 10 Number of tries after 738 underload fault trip 2 10 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Keypad Control Control Keypad Menu M2 The parameters for the selection of control place and direction on the keypad are listed below See the Keypad control menu in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Table 2 11 Keypad Control Parameters M2 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust D Note R21 Keypad reference Par 111 Par 1172 2 P1 2 Direction on keypad 1 123 0 Forward 1 Reverse R2 3 Stop button 1 1 114 0 Limited function of Stop button 1 Stop button always enabled System Menu Control Keypad Menu M5 For parameters and functions related to the general use of the drive such as application and language selection customized parameter sets or information about the hardware and software see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Expander Boards Control Keypad Menu M6 The M6 menu shows the expander
207. talled shaft The reaction time of the stall protection can be set shorter than that of motor thermal protection The stall state is defined with two parameters ID710 Stall current and ID712 Stall frequency limit If the current is higher than the set limit and output frequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true There is actually no real indication of the shaft rotation Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Parameters of Underload Protection ID713 to ID716 General The purpose of the motor underload protection is to ensure that there is load on the motor when the drive is running If the motor loses its load there might be a problem in the process e g a broken belt or a dry pump Motor underload protection can be adjusted by setting the underload curve with parameters ID714 Field weakening area load and ID715 Zero frequency load see below The underload curve is a squared curve set between the zero frequency and the field weakening point The protection is not active below 5 Hz the underload time counter is stopped The torque values for setting the underload curve are set in percentage which refers to the nominal torque of the motor The motor s name plate data parameter motor nominal current and the drive s nominal current l4 are used to find the scaling ratio for the inte
208. tart enabled open contact start disabled and drive stopped if running Reference scaling minimum 3 P1 2 18 value place B Reference scaling maximum 3 P1 2 19 value place B See ID303 and ID304 above For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 35 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 367 Motor potentiometer memory 3567 P1 2 23 P1 2 28 P1 2 1 3 P1 2 1 16 reset Frequency reference 0 No reset 1 Memory reset in stop and power down 2 Memory reset in power down 370 Motor potentiometer memory 57 P1 2 29 P1 2 1 17 reset PID reference 0 No reset 1 Memory reset in stop and power down 2 Memory reset in power down 371 PID reference 2 Place A 7 P1 2 1 4 additional reference If the PID reference 2 enable input function ID330 TRUE this parameter defines which reference place is selected as PID controller reference Al1 reference terminals 2 and 3 e g potentiometer AI2 reference terminals 5 and 6 e g transducer Al3 reference Al4 reference PID reference 1 from keypad Reference from Fieldbus FBProcessDatalN3 Motor potentiometer PID reference 2 from keypad oO ol kh WN J If value 6 is selected for this parameter the functions Motor potentiometer DOWN and Motor potentiometer UP must be connected to digital inputs ID417 and ID419 372 Supervised analog input 7 P1 3 2 13 0 Analog reference from AI1 terminals 2 and 3 e g potentiometer 1 Analog refer
209. temperature supervision P1 pm 2 12 FC temperature 10 pen value P1 3 2 10 External 100 0 brake on delay 7 18 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 7 11 Output Signals Limit Settings G1 3 2 Continued Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust D P1 3 2 13 Supervised analog 1 372 0 Al1 input 1 Al2 P1 3 2 14 Analog input 2 3 3 0 No limit supervision limit 1 Low limit supervision 2 High limit supervision P1 3 2 15 Analog input 100 00 A 374 supervised value Analog Output 1 Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 3 Table 7 12 Output Signals Analog Output 1 G1 3 3 cose Parameter Mim Max Unit Default Cust ID P1 3 3 1 Analog output AnOUT 0 1 AnOUT E 10 AnOUT A 1 signal selection P1 3 3 2 Analog output 14 1 307 0 Not used function 1 Output freq 0 fmax 2 Freq reference 0 fmax 3 Motor speed 0 Motor nominal speed 4 Motor current 0 Innotor 5 Motor torque 0 ThMotor 6 Motor power 0 Pamotor 7 Motor voltage 0 VahMotor 8 DC link volt 0 1000V 9 PID controller ref value 10 PID contr act value 1 11 PID contr act value 2 12 PID contr error value 13 PID controller output 14 PT100 temperature P1 3 3 3 Analog output 10 00 filter time P1 3 3 4 Analog output 1 inversion P1 3 3 5 Analog output 1 minimum P1 3
210. ter ramp time NO O1 RP WN P1 2 1 3 Motor 2 1 367 0 No reset potentiometer 1 Reset if stopped or powered frequency down reference memory 2 Reset if powered down reset P1 2 1 4 Adjust input 0 Not used 1 Al1 2 Al2 3 AI3 4 Al4 5 Fieldbus FBProcessDatalN3 Mia eee uo i ot Analog Input 1 Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 2 2 Table 6 5 Analog Input 1 Parameters G1 2 2 a a WA M WEMECACN NE 3 P1 2 2 1 Al1 signal 377 selection Al1 signal range 0 0 SS 1 20 100 2 10V 10V 3 Custom range 9 P1 2 2 4 AI1 custom 100 00 100 00 321 minimum setting P1 2 2 5 Al1 custom 100 00 100 00 A 100 00 322 maximum setting Al1 reference 320 00 303 Selects the frequency that scaling minimum corresponds to the min value reference signal Remember to place jumpers of block X2 accordingly See SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Chapter 4 6 10 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 6 5 Analog Input 1 Parameters G1 2 2 Continued Code Parameter Mi Max Unit Default Gust ID Note P1 2 2 7 All reference 320 00 Hz 304 Selects the frequency that scaling maximum corresponds to the max value reference signal P1 2 2 8 AIl1 joystick 20 00 384 a aaa E a M 9 Pi2zW ATjyewkofser so0 so e Joo e Analog
211. the active set only For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 498 Start pulse memory 3 P1 2 24 Giving a value to this parameter determines if the present RUN status is copied when the control place is changed from A to B or vice versa 0 The RUN status is not copied 1 The RUN status is copied In order for this parameter to have effect ID300 and ID363 must have been set the value 3 500 Acceleration Deceleration 234567 P1 4 1 ramp 1 shape 501 Acceleration Deceleration 234567 P1 4 2 ramp 2 shape The start and end of the acceleration and deceleration ramps can be smoothed with these parameters Setting a value of 0 0 gives a linear ramp shape which causes acceleration and deceleration to react immediately to the changes in the reference signal Setting a value from 0 1 10 seconds for this parameter produces an S shaped acceleration deceleration The acceleration time is determined with ID103 and ID104 ID502 and ID503 ID103 ID104 ID502 ID503 ID500 ID501 Figure 8 42 Acceleration Deceleration S shaped 502 Acceleration time 2 234567 P 1 4 3 503 Deceleration time 2 234567 P1 4 4 These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to accelerate from the zero frequency to the set maximum frequency ID102 These parameters provide the possibility to set two different acceleration deceleration time
212. the integration time of the PID controller If this parameter is set to 1 00 second a change of 10 in the error value causes the controller output to change by 10 00 s If the parameter value is set to 0 00 s the PID controller will operate as PD controller See the examples on Page 8 5 Motor Power Factor P1 10 P1 1 10 Find this value Power Factor on the rating plate of the motor Jogging speed reference 34567 P1 1 14 P1 1 15 P1 1 19 Defines the jogging speed selected with the DIN3 digital input which can be programmed for Jogging speed See parameter ID301 This parameter s value is automatically limited between minimum and maximum frequency ID101 and ID102 Preset speed 3 46 P1 1 17 Preset speed 4 46 P1 1 18 Preset speed 5 46 P1 1 19 Preset speed 6 46 P1 1 20 Preset speed 7 46 P1 1 21 These parameter values define the Multi step speeds selected with the DIN3 DIN4 DIN5 and DIN6 digital inputs See also parameters ID105 and ID106 These parameter values are automatically limited between minimum and maximum frequency ID101 and ID102 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 132 MN04004001E Table 8 2 Preset Speeds 3 to 7 Multi step speed Multi step speed Multi step speed Multi step speed Speed select 1 DIN4 select 2 DIN5 select 3 DIN6 select 4 DIN3 Beesed fof ig tO mmu p b mus
213. tics autochange interlockings applied to auxiliary drives only The drive controlled by the frequency converter remains the same Only the mains contactor is needed for each drive See Figure 8 61 Motor Aux 2 Motor Aux 2 So Te ee Figure 8 61 Autochange Applied to Auxiliary Drives Only 1 All drives included in the autochange interlockings sequence The drive controlled by the frequency converter is included in the automatics and two contactors are needed for each drive to connect it to the mains or the frequency converter See Figure 8 62 Auxiliary Auxiliary Connection Connection Drive 1 Figure 8 62 Autochange with All Drives MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 81 SPX9000 AF Drives 8 82 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 1029 Autochange interval 7 P1 9 26 1030 1031 After the expiration of the time defined with this parameter the autochange function takes place if the capacity used lies below the level defined with ID1031 Autochange frequency limit and ID1030 Maximum number of auxiliary drives Should the capacity exceed the value of ID1031 the autochange will not take place before the capacity goes below this limit The time count is activated only if the Start Stop request is active The time count is reset after the autochange has taken place See Figure 8 63 Maximum number of auxiliary 7 P1 9 27 drives Autochange frequency limit 7 P1 9 28
214. to 0 will reset the thermal stage of the motor to 0 See Page A 4 Motor thermal protection 234567 P1 7 9 Motor ambient temp factor The factor can be set between 100 0 100 0 See Page A 4 Motor thermal protection 234567 P1 7 10 Motor cooling factor at zero speed The current can be set between 0 150 0 x Inmotor This parameter sets the value for thermal current at zero frequency See Figure 8 47 The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor If an external fan is used this parameter can be set to 90 or even higher Note The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate data ID113 nominal current of the motor not the drive s nominal output current The motor s nominal current is the current that the motor can withstand in direct on line use without being overheated If you change the parameter Nominal current of motor this parameter is automatically restored to the default value Setting this parameter does not affect the maximum output current of the drive which is determined by ID107 alone See Page A 4 Cooling Overload Area ID706 40 Figure 8 47 Motor Thermal Current ly Curve For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 63 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 707 Motor thermal protection 234567 P1 7 11 Time constant This time can be set between 1 and 200 minutes This is the thermal time constant of the
215. to keypad 7 Closing contact Force control place to fieldbus When the control place is forced to change the values of Start Stop Direction and the Reference valid in the respective control place are used reference according to ID343 ID121 and ID122 Note The value of ID125 Keypad Control Place does not change When DIN2 opens the control place is selected according to keypad control place selection 8 Reverse Contact open Forward Contact closed Reverse Note If several inputs are programmed to reverse one active contact is enough to set the direction to reverse o c 9 Jog speed see ID124 Contact closed Jogging speed selected for frequency reference 10 Fault reset Contact closed All faults reset 11 Acceleration Deceleration prohibited Contact closed No acceleration or deceleration possible until the contact is opened 12 DC braking command Contact closed In Stop mode the DC braking operates until the contact is opened See Figure 8 17 13 Motor potentiometer UP Contact closed Reference increases until the contact is opened MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 8 21 SPX9000 AF Drives 8 22 E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Output Output Frequency Frequency Figure 8 17 DC Braking Command Selection 12 Selected for DIN2 Left Stop mode ramp Right Stop mode coasting 320 AIT signal range 34567 P1 2 4 P1 2 16 P1 2 2 3 321 322 Table 8 9 S
216. tonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Output Signals Delayed Digital Output 1 Keypad Menu M1 G1 3 1 Table 6 11 Delayed Digital Output 1 Parameters G1 3 1 i lee Me ma MAE MR P1 3 1 1 Digital output 1 486 signal selection Digital output 1 312 0 Not used function 4 Fault inverted 5 FC overheat warning 6 Ext fault or warning 7 Ref fault or warning 8 Warning 9 Reverse 10 Jogging spd selected 11 At speed 12 Mot regulator active 13 Freq limit 1 superv 14 Freq limit 2 superv 15 Torque limit superv 16 Ref limit supervision 17 External brake control 18 Remote control active 19 FC temp limit superv 20 Reference inverted 21 Ext brake control inverted 22 Therm fault or warn 23 On Off control 24 Fieldbus input data 1 25 Fieldbus input data 2 26 Fieldbus input data 3 P1 3 1 3 Digital output 1 on 320 00 487 0 00 delay not in use delay P1 3 1 4 Digital output 1 off 320 00 ee gym 0 00 delay not in use delay Delayed Digital Output 2 Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 2 Table 6 12 Delayed Digital Output 2 Parameters G1 3 2 o_o o _ Se eee on EM I P1 3 2 1 Digital output 2 489 signal selection P1 3 2 2 Digital output 2 See par 1 3 1 2 function P1 3 2 3 Digital output 2 on 320 00 491 0 00 delay not in use delay P1 3 2 4 Digital output 2 off aa 320 00 so fpe o 492 0 00 delay n
217. tor damage 8 56 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 521 Motor control mode 2 6 P1 6 12 With this parameter you can set another motor control mode The mode which is used is determined by ID164 For the available selections see ID600 600 Motor control mode 234567 P1 6 1 SVX 0 Frequency control The I O terminal and keypad references are frequency references and the frequency converter controls the output frequency output frequency resolution 0 01 Hz 1 Speed control The I O terminal and keypad references are speed references and the frequency converter controls the motor speed compensating for motor slip accuracy 0 5 The following selections are available for SVXP drives only except for selection 2 which is available in the Multi Purpose Control Application for SVX drives also 2 Torque control In torque control mode the references are used to control the motor torque 3 Speed control closed loop The I O terminal and keypad references are speed references and the frequency converter controls the motor speed very accurately comparing the actual speed received from the tachometer to the speed reference accuracy 0 01 4 Torque control closed loop The I O terminal and keypad references are torque references and the frequency converter controls the motor torque 5 Frequency control advanced open loop Frequency cont
218. tor start disabled and the motor is stopped Applications 2 to 5 4 Acc Dec time select contact open Acceleration deceleration time 1 selected contact closed Acceleration deceleration time 2 selected 5 Closing contact Force control place to I O terminal 6 Closing contact Force control place to keypad 7 Closing contact Force control place to fieldbus When the control place is forced to change the values of Start Stop Direction and Reference valid in the respective control place are used reference according to parameters ID173 and ID174 Note The value of ID125 Keypad Control Place does not change When DIN3 opens the control place is selected according to parameter 3 1 Applications 2 to 5 8 Reverse contact open Forward contact closed Reverse Note Can be used for reversing if ID300 has a value of 3 Applications 3 to 5 9 Jogging speed contact closed Jogging speed selected for frequency reference 10 Fault reset contact closed Resets all faults 11 Acc dec operation prohibited contact closed Stops acceleration or deceleration until the contact is opened 12 DC braking command contact closed In Stop mode the DC braking operates until the contact is opened see Figure 8 9 Applications 3 and 5 13 Motor potentiometer down contact closed Reference decreases until the contact is opened Application 4 13 Preset speed 8 14 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E
219. trl 5 Adv open loop freq control 6 Advanced open loop speed control P1 6 4 Field weakening 8 00 point P1 6 5 Voltage at field 10 00 200 00 100 00 603 n x Unmot weakening point P1 6 6 V Hz curve Par 1 6 4 Hz 60 00 midpoint frequency P1 6 7 V Hz curve 100 00 100 00 605 n x Unmot midpoint voltage Parameter max value par 1 6 5 3 10 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 3 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Continued Code Parameter Mim Max Unit Defaut Cust DD Note P1 6 89 Output voltage 40 00 76 n x Unmot at zero frequency P1 6 9 Switching frequency P1 6 10 Overvoltage controller kHz Varies 601 See Table 8 12 on Page 8 57 for exact values 0 Not used 1 Used no ramping 2 Used ramping 0 Not used 1 Used 1 1 Drooping of nominal speed at nominal torque 0 Not used 1 Used P1 6 12 Load Drooping Closed Loop parameter group 1 6 14 SPX only P1 6 14 1 Magnetizing 100 00 current P1 6 14 2 Speed control P 1000 gain P1 6 14 3 Speed control I 500 0 time P1 6 11 Undervoltage controller A OO O O c OO O O O I ms O N P1 6 14 4 Load drooping 100 00 A P1 6 14 5 Acceleration 300 00 compensation P1 6 14 6 Slip adjust P1 6 14 7 Magnetizing MotCurr MotCurr current at start Min
220. trol place and direction on the keypad are listed below See the Keypad control menu in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Table 5 11 Keypad Control Parameters M2 Mm uu ANM UN NE E NM Direction on 123 0 Forward keypad Reverse R2 2 PID reference 0 00 100 00 000 a 3 PID PID reference2 2 CORLI 00 a z 4 SL MN button uh Limited function of Stop button 1 Stop button always enabled System Menu Control Keypad Menu M5 For parameters and functions related to the general use of the drive such as application and language selection customized parameter sets or information about the hardware and software see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Expander Boards Control Keypad Menu M6 The M6 menu shows the expander and option boards attached to the control board and board related information For more information see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual 5 16 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 cae Chapter 6 Multi Purpose Control Application SVCHST06 Introduction Select the Multi Purpose Control Application in menu M5 See Chapter 5 of the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Multi purpose control application provides a wide range of parameters for controlling motors It can be used for various kinds of different processes where wide flexibility of I O signals i
221. u Control Keypad Menu M5 For parameters and functions related to the general use of the drive such as application and language selection customized parameter sets or information about the hardware and software see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual Expander Boards Control Keypad Menu M6 The M6 menu shows the expander and option boards attached to the control board and board related information For more information see Chapter 5 in the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 4 13 SPX9000 AF Drives 4 14 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 MN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 ea Chapter 5 PID Control Application SVCHST05 Introduction Select the PID Control Application in menu M5 See Chapter 5 of the SVX9000 AF Drives User Manual In the PID Control Application there are two I O terminal control places place A is the PID controller and source B is the direct frequency reference The control place A or B is selected with digital input DING The PID controller reference can be selected from the analog inputs fieldbus motorized potentiometer enabling the PID Reference 2 or applying the control keypad reference The PID controller actual value can be selected from the analog inputs fieldbus the actual values of the motor or through the mathematical functi
222. ue 10 Max freq 60 Hz As the power is switched on the system detects the difference between the setpoint and the actual process value and starts to either raise or decrease in case the error value is negative the PID output according to the l time Once the difference between the setpoint and the process value has been reduced to 0 the output is reduced by the amount corresponding to the value of P1 1 13 In case the error value is negative the frequency converter reacts reducing the output correspondingly See Figure 8 4 PID Output Error Value Figure 8 4 PID Output Curve with the Values of Example 2 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Example 3 Given values P1 1 12 P 100 P1 1 13 l time 0 00 s P1 1 14 D time 1 00 s Min freq 0 Hz Error value setpoint process value 10 s Max freq 60 Hz As the error value increases the PID output also increases according to the set values D time 1 00s PID Output A Error Value 7 7 D part 10 5 00 Hz 7 Sea eee E TR ND part 10 5 00 Hz N b M bh NONO A x2 N N T N Q G N Figure 8 5 PID Output Curve with the Values of Example 3 133 Preset speed 8 4 P1 1 22 134 Preset speed 9 4 P1 1 23 135 Preset speed 10 4 P1 1 24 136 Preset speed 11 4 P1 1 25 137 Preset speed 12 4 P1 1
223. ue reference 3 Start up torque fwd rev MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 5 13 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Protections Control Keypad Menu M1 G1 7 Table 5 9 Protections G1 7 Code Parameter Min Mex Unit Defaut Cust D Note P1 7 1 Response to 4mA 5 700 0 No response reference fault 1 Warning 2 Warning Previous Freq 3 Wrng PresetFreq 1 7 2 4 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 5 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 2 4mA reference fault Par 1 1 2 Hz 728 frequency P1 7 3 Response to 3 2 701 0 No response external fault 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 P1 7 4 Input phase 3 730 me e e ERR P1 7 5 Response to 1 3 2 727 undervoltage fault P1 7 6 Output phase 3 2 702 supervision PT Earth fault 703 protection P1 7 8 Thermal protection 704 of the motor P1 7 9 Motor ambient 100 0 100 0 705 temperature factor P1 7 10 Motor cooling 150 0 A 706 factor at zero speed P1 7 11 Motor thermal time min 45 707 constant me x p p pe P1 7 13 Stall protection 709 0 No response 1 Warning 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 15 Stall time limit 1 00 120 00 P1 7 16 Stall frequency limit 1 0 Par 1 1 2 Hz 0 No response 1 Warning PT 7 17 Underload protection 2 Fault stop acc to 1 4 7 3 Fault stop by coasting P1 7 18 Field weakening area load 150 0 P1 7 19 Zero frequency load 5 P1 7 20 Underl
224. uencieS i o 3 403 09 qox XC RC ede d OS ESE Ae Hee Oe ERTS 8 56 Figure 8 47 Motor Thermal Current IT Curve 0 0 ccc eee 8 63 Figure 8 48 Motor Temperature Calculation 0 0 00 ccc es 8 64 Figure 8 49 Stall Characteristics Settings 0 ccc eee ee eee 8 65 Figure 8 50 Stall Time Count 0 0 ee eee eee 8 65 Figure 8 51 Setting of Minimum Load 0 ees 8 66 Figure 8 52 Underload Time Counter Function anana eee ee eee 8 67 Figure 8 53 Example of Automatic Restarts with Two Restarts LL 8 68 Figure 8 54 Example of Parameter Setting nanana eee ee eee eee 8 74 Figure 8 55 Reference Steps after Starting Auxiliary Drives LL 8 75 Figure 8 56 Frequency Converter Sleep Function eee eee ees 8 76 Figure 8 57 Example of Adjustable Frequency Drive and Two Auxiliary Drives with Bypassed PID Controller Less 8 78 Figure 8 58 Input and Output Pressure Measuring llle 8 79 Figure 8 59 Output Pressure Behavior Depending on Input Pressure and Parameter Settings slc 8 79 Figure 8 60 Frequency Drop and Increase Delays 000 0 eee e eee eee aes 8 80 Figure 8 61 Autochange Applied to Auxiliary Drives Only 20000 eee ees 8 81 Figure 8 62 Autochange with All Drives 0 0 0 ccc es 8 81 Figure 8 63 Autochange Interval and Limits llle 8 82
225. value In 96 of the max error value V1 21 PID Output In 96 of the max output value V1 22 Running auxiliary drives Jo Number of running auxiliary drives V1 23 Special display for actual 29 See parameters 1 9 29 to 1 9 31 value V1 24 PT 100 temperature 1 Highest temperature of used PT100 inputs G1 25 Multimonitoring items a a Displays 3 selectable monitor values Basic Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 1 Table 7 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Note 60 00 P1 1 2 Max frequency Par 1 1 1 320 00 Hz 102 NOTE If fmax gt than the motor synchronous speed check suitability for motor and drive system Pi13_ Accelerationtime 01 30000 s po wa S Fia Decelerationtime 1 01 30000 s po maf FILS Curentimt 04xm fx A a po P1 1 66 Nominal voltage of 180 V SPX2 230V 110 the motor SPXb 460V SPX6 690V P1 1 7 Nominal frequency 30 00 320 00 Hz 60 00 111 Check the rating plate of the of the motor motor P1 1 8 Nominal speed of 20 000 rpm 112 The default applies for a 4 pole the motor motor and a nominal size frequency converter 113 Check the rating plate of the motor 120 Check the rating plate of the motor 171 1 1 O Terminal 2 Keypad 3 Fieldbus 0 85 3 P1 1 9 Nominal current of O 4A xl 2xIy A lu the motor 0 P1 1 10 Power factor 1 P1 1 11 Local control place 1 1 12 Remote control mE
226. vision limit 0 1 331 frequency reference memory reset P1 2 24 Start pulse memory 498 0 Run state not copied 1 Run state copied Rising edge required to start 3 6 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Output Signals Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 3 Table 3 5 Output Signals G1 3 et Me M M MINNIE e P1 3 19 AO signal TTF programming method used selection See Page 6 3 307 0 Not used 1 Output freq 0 fmax 2 Freq reference 0 f 3 Motor speed 0 Motor nominal speed 4 Motor current 0 lhMotor 5 Motor torque 0 Tymotor 6 Motor power 0 PhMotor 7 Motor voltage 0 Unmotor 8 DC bus volt 0 1000V 0 No filtering 309 0 Not inverted 1 2 Inverted P1 3 2 Analog output function 312 0 Not used 1 Ready 2 Run 3 Fault 4 Fault inverted 5 FC overheat warning 6 Ext fault or warning 7 Ref fault or warning 8 Warning 9 Reversed 10 Jogging spd selected 11 At speed 12 Mot regulator active 13 OP freq limit superv 1 14 OP freq limit superv 2 Fia Analog output 10 00 filter time P1 3 4 Analog output inversion P1 3 5 Analog output minimum P1 3 6 Analog output 1000 scale P1 3 9 T output 2 T P1 3 10 Output frequency limit 1 supervision 1 3 7 Digital output 1 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonEl
227. w EatonElectrical com 7 23 SPX9000 AF Drives E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Table 7 18 Protections G1 7 Continued mu um m m MEM P1 7 22 Response to 733 See P1 7 3 fieldbus fault P1 7 23 Response to slot 734 See P1 7 3 fault P1724 7 24 No No of PT100 inputs PT100 No of PT100 inputs 0 739 x 7 25 Response to PT100 mE I M 0 Fault stored to a fault 1 Fault not stored to history Autorestart Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 8 Table 7 19 Autorestart Parameters G1 8 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cus ID Noe a c o R a s 8 3 S mode cet Ramp 1 Flying start 2 Start per P1 4 6 P1 8 4 Number of tries after undervoltage trip P1 8 5 Number of tries after overvoltage trip P1 8 6 Number of tries after overcurrent trip P1 8 7 Number of tries after 4mA P1 8 8 Number of tries after motor temperature fault trip P1 8 9 Number of tries after external fault trip P1 8 10 Number of tries after underload fault trip 7 24 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MIN04004001E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Pump and Fan Control Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 9 Table 7 20 Pump and Fan Control Parameters G1 9 Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust D Note P1 9 1 Number of auxiliary 1 1001 drives P1 9 2 Start frequency P1 9 3 320 00 Hz 61 00 1002 auxiliary drive 1
228. z vra Motorcurent A Frequency reference to motor control Motor speed in rpm of motor nominal torque Motor shaft power Heatsink temperature Calculated motor temperature Wir Meere Wv Vis DCBuvotae V c V1 1 V1 2 2 3 5 7 In Digital input statuses van Anatoginputt V mA 1 5 13 14 15 MN04004001E For more information visit www EatonElectrical com 3 3 SPX9000 AF Drives Table 3 2 Monitoring Values Continued Code Parameter UM D bewb m vive DING DING ONG fe Wu orror p E T N Cutler Hammer August 2005 Digital input statuses Digital and relay output statuses M1 17 Multimonitoring items i Displays three selectable monitoring values Basic Parameters Control Keypad Menu M1 gt G1 1 Table 3 3 Basic Parameters G1 1 Cue meme Me Cm ume Jue gm eec 00 PITT Minfrequeny 000 Par 112m2 090 or P1 1 2 Max frequency Par 1 1 1 320 00 60 00 e P1 1 3 Acceleration time 1 0 1 3000 0 0 P1 1 4 Deceleration time 1 9 1 aoa 0 NE Saxk xh SPX4 460V P1 1 6 Nominal voltage of the 180 motor SPX5 690V P1 1 7 Nominal frequency of 30 00 320 00 iul 00 the motor V XE cM av P1 1 9 Nominal current ofthe 0 4 xl 2xly A motor um mue ee m Remote Control Place Loc A reference P1 1 12 P1 1 13 Loc B reference Remote control reference Jogging speed reference P1 1 16 3 4 For more info
229. zero frequency P1 6 9 Switching frequency 1 0 i P1 6 10 Overvoltage controller Varies kHz Varies 601 See Table 8 12 on Page 8 57 for exact values 2 1 607 0 Not used 1 Used no ramping 2 Used ramping P1 6 11 Undervoltage 1 1 08 controller P1 6 12 Load Drooping male 100 00 0 01 EE ue m d dod lo 6 0 Not used 1 Used 620 Drooping 96 of nominal speed at nominal torque 631 0 Not used 1 Used 5 12 For more information visit www EatonElectrical com MNO04004001 E E T N Cutler Hammer SPX9000 AF Drives August 2005 Table 5 8 Motor Control Parameters G1 6 Continued Code Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust D Note Closed Loop parameter group 1 6 14 SPX only PIS341 Magnetizing current 0 00 100 00 A 000 pe P6142 Speed control Pgainjo 90 fo 88 PI amp 143 Speed control time 0 0 s00 ms 00 je P1144 Load drooping 000 10000 009 fo Pen Veompersaton PF a compensation PIS3AS Slipadust o fo po 88 P1 6 14 7 Magnetizing current MotCurr MotCurr A 627 at start Min Max P1 6 14 8 Magnetizing time at 600 0 628 start PIETAS O speedtime atstart 0 92000 ms soo m w N6 P1 6 14 12 Start up torque FWD 300 0 300 0 P1 6 14 13 Start up torque REV 300 0 300 0 P1 6 14 15 Encoder filter time P1 6 14 17 Current control P gain P1 6 14 11 Start up torque 3 0 Not used 1 Torque memory 2 Torq

Eaton SPX App Manual MN04004001E

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents